You are on page 1of 181

IARU-R1 VHF Handbook

Vet

Vers Version 9.01 March 2021


ion 8.12
IARU-R1

The content of this Handbook is the property of the


International Amateur Radio Union, Region 1.

Copying and publication of the content, or parts thereof, is allowed for non-commercial purposes provided
the source of information is quoted.

Contact information

Website: http://www.iaru-r1.org/index.php/vhfuhsshf
Newsletters: http://www.iaru-
r1.org/index.php/documents/Documents/Newsletters/VHF-Newsletters/
Wiki http://iaruwiki.oevsv.at
Contest robot http://iaru.oevsv.at/v_upld/prg_list.php

VHF Handbook 9.00 1/180


IARU-R1

Oostende, 17 March 2021

Dear YL and OM,

The Handbook consists of 5 PARTS who are covering all aspects of the VHF community:
• PART 1: IARU-R1 VHF& up Organisation
• PART 2: Bandplanning
• PART 3: Contesting
• PART 4: Technical and operational references
• PART 5: archive

This handbook is updated with the new VHF contest dates and rules and some typo’s in the rest of the
handbook. Those changes are highlighted in yellow.

The recommendations made during this Virtual General conference are highlighted in turquoise

73 de Jacques, ON4AVJ
Secretary VHF+ committee (C5) IARU-R1

VHF Handbook 9.00 2/180


IARU-R1

CONTENT
PART 1: IARU-1 VHF & UP ORGANISATION

ORGANISATION 17

Constitution of the IARU Region 1 VHF/UHF/Microwaves Committee 17


In the Constitution: 17
In the Bye-laws: 17
Terms of reference of the IARU Region 1 VHF/UHF/Microwaves Committee 18

Tasks of IARU R-1 and its VHF/UHF/µWave Committee 19

Microwave managers Sub-committee 20

Coordinators of the VHF/UHF/Microwaves Committee 21


VHF Contest Coordinator 21
Satellite coordinator 21
Beacon coordinator 21
Propagations coordinators 21
Records coordinator 21
Repeater coordinator 21

IARU R-1 Executive Committee 21

Actual IARU-R1 VHF/UHF/SHF Chairman, Co-ordinators and co-workers 22

National VHF managers 23

Microwave managers 25
Note. 25

RECOMMENDATIONS FOR VHF MANAGERS 26

Actions needed to protect the 23cm band in WRC 2023(VGC 2020) 26

Protect our amateur bands(Landshut 2017) 26


General 26
24 and 47 GHz band 26
Millimetre bands 26
50 MHz Band 27

Defending the bands from 1 GHz to 10 GHz (Vienna 2019) 27


Introduction 27
Actions 27

Licenced share access (LSA) 27

Band activity survey 28

Proper use of amateur frequencies (Cavtat 2008) 28

Satellite frequency coordination (Cavtat 2008) 28


VHF Handbook 9.00 3/180
IARU-R1
145MHz for satellite downlinks (Cavtat 2008) 28

Multi-Band beacon clusters (Cavtat 2008) 28

3400-3410MHz allocation 28

Contest Log exchange 28

DX code of conduct (Varna 2014) 29

TV Repeater Transmissions (Varna 2014) 29

Remote Controlled Operation (Varna 2014) 29

Information about repeaters 29

IARU R-1 AND IARU SATELLITE COORDINATION 30

ITU Notification Requirements for Amateur Satellites 30


Background 30
Procedure 30

IARU-AC 89-3 concerning amateur satellite usage 31

Terms of reference of the IARU satellite adviser 32


General: 32
Function 32
Appointment: 32
Tasks: 32

Terms of reference of the IARU AMSAT satellite frequency coordinator 33


General 33
Function 33
Appointment 33
Tasks 33

RELEVANT IARU REGION-1 RECOMMENDATIONS 34


Recommendation CT08_C5_Rec01 34
Recommendation CT08_C5_Rec02 34
Recommendation CT08_C5_Rec22 34
Recommendation CT08_C5_Rec25 34
Recommendation CT08_C5_Rec37 34

IARU-R1 REPEATER COORDINATION 35

Coordination of repeater activities 35

Repeater coordination: coverage presentation 36


Introduction 36
General rules for operating via repeaters 36
Recommended methods to prepare coverage map 36

IARU-R1 BEACON COORDINATION 37

VHF Handbook 9.00 4/180


IARU-R1
IARU R1 beacons: a guide to good practice 37
Coordination procedure 37
Local Beacons: 37
Transmission mode 37
Frequency spacing 37

Transatlantic beacon project 38

Synchronised 50 MHz Beacon Project (Varna 2014) 39


Introduction 39
50 MHz synchronised not transmitting in their timeslot 39

IARU-R1 CERTIFICATES AND MEDALS 40

DB6NT 40

S53MV 40

National VHF/UHF/µWaves awards and certificates 41


Note 41

PART 2: IARU-1 VHF & UP BANDPLAN

IARU REGION 1 BANDPLANS 43

Introduction 43
General 43
European table of frequency allocations 43

50 – 54 MHz Band plan 44


Notes: bandplan 45
Footnotes: 45
Usage Notes 45

70.0 – 70.5 MHz Band plan 46


Notes: BANDPLAN 46
Notes: Usage 46

144 – 146 MHz Bandplan 47


Notes: BANDPLAN 48
Notes: Usage 49
National usage notes 49

430 – 440 MHz 50


Notes: BANDPLAN 52
Notes: Usage 52
National usage notes 53

1.5.4 DATV AND EXPERIMENTAL DATA USAGE IN THE 436-438 MHZ BAND (VGC 2020) 53

1200 – 1300 MHz Bandplan 54


Notes: BANDPLAN 55
VHF Handbook 9.00 5/180
IARU-R1
Notes: Usage 56

2300 – 2450 MHz Bandplan 57


Notes: BANDPLAN 57

3400 -3475 MHz 58


Notes: BANDPLAN 58

5650 – 5850 MHz Bandplan 59


Notes: BANDPLAN 59

10.000 – 10.500 GHz Bandplan 60


Notes: BANDPLAN 60

24.000 – 24250 GHz Bandplan 61


Notes: BANDPLAN 61

47.000 – 47.200 GHz Bandplan 62

75.500 – 81.500 GHz Bandplan 63


Notes: BANDPLAN 63

122.250 – 123.000 GHz Bandplan 64

134.000 – 141.000 GHz Bandplan 65


Notes: BANDPLAN 65

241.000 – 250.000 GHz Bandplan 66


Notes: BANDPLAN 66

Additional Band plans 67


Table 1 Irish 40–44 MHz (8 metre) Band Plan for Amateur Service 67
Table 2 Irish 54.0–69.9 MHz (5 metre) Band Plan for Amateur Service 69

MANAGING FREQUENCY ALLOCATIONS & BAND PLANNING 70

Introduction to VHF/UHF/µWaves bands and bandplans 70


Amateur and Amateur Satellite Service frequency allocations above 30 MHz 70

IARU-R1 Bandplanning: principles 70


Basis 70
Remarks on the practical implementation 71
Coordination process: 72
Some definitions 72

ITU and WRC Frequency Allocations Process 73


List of Regional Telecommunications Organisations (RTOs) 73

Channel designation system for VHF/UHF FM channels 74


Principle 74
Examples 74
Notes: 74

VHF Handbook 9.00 6/180


IARU-R1
PART 2: IARU-1 VHF & UP CONTESTING

RULES IARU R1 50/70 MHZ, 145 MHZ AND UHF/µW CONTESTS 76

Objective 76

Definitions 76

Conditions for entrants 76

Date of contests 77

Contest sections 77
50 MHz Contest: 77
70 MHz Contest: 77
145 MHz contest: 77
435 MHz Band: 77
1.3 GHz, 2.4 GHz, 3.4 GHz, 5.7 GHz, 10 GHz bands and for the Millimetre group (the combined group of
amateur bands above 10 GHz): 77

Operating 77

Contacts 78
Acceptable examples when using a secondary method: 78
Unacceptable examples when using a secondary method: 78
Definition for a valid contest QSO: 78

Type of emission 78

Contest exchanges 78
CW, SSB or FM/PM modes 78
MGM modes 79

Scoring 79
50 and 70 MHz CW/SSB only, 145 MHz and UHF/Microwave Contests 79
50 and 70 MHz MGM Contests 79

Entries 80
50 and 70 MHz CW/SSB only, 145 MHz and UHF/Microwave Contests 80
50 and 70 MHz MGM Contests 80
Stations eligible to win a prize 81

Judging of entries 81

Awards 81
Section winners: 81
Overall winners for UHF/Microwave contest: 81
Millimetre group 81

RULES IARU REGION I ATV CONTEST 82

Goal 82

VHF Handbook 9.00 7/180


IARU-R1
Terms and Definitions 82

Responsibilities 83

Contest 83

PROCEDURE FOR ORGANISING IARU-R1 1 VHF/UHF/µWAVE CONTESTS 85

Terms of reference for the contest working group 85


Objectives 85
Responsibilities 85
Group Membership 85
Actual membership 86

Financing and management of the contest robot (VGC2020) 86

Sub-regional VHF/UHF/µWave contest coordination within IARU-R1 86

MONTHLY DIGITAL ACTIVITY CONTEST (VGC 2020) 86

MGM CONTEST OPERATING PROCEDURES 87

Introduction 87

What needs to be logged? 87

VHF& UP TROPHY (VGC 2020) 88

Objective 88

Dates and bands 88

Rules 88

Categories: 88
145 MHz band: 88
435 MHz band: 88
1.3 GHz, 2.4 GHz, 3.4 GHz, 5.7 GHz, 10 GHz bands and for the Millimetre group (the combined group of
amateur bands above 10 GHz): 88

ELECTRONIC CONTEST LOG EXCHANGE 89

Introduction 89

Logbook programs supporting EDI 89

Standard format for Electronic Contest Log Exchange (Vienna 1998) 90


Format 90
Explanation of keywords in header 91
QSO record definition 94
Characters 94
Line length 94

VHF Handbook 9.00 8/180


IARU-R1
Separator (;) 95
Faulty QSOs 95
QSO numbers 95
Missing information 95
Example: Region 1 Contest, standard type 95
Example : AGCW DL VHF Contest (contest manager: DJ2QZ) 97

AUTOMATIC CONTEST ADJUCTION SOFTWARE 99

PART 4: OPERATIONAL & TECHNICAL REFERENCES

ENCOURAGING INOVATIONS(VGC 2020) 101

Wideband experimentations (VGC 2020) 101

OPERATING PROCEDURES 101

Minimum Requirement for a valid QSO 101

Weak-signal QSO procedure 101


The Basis of the Procedure 101
Procedure 101
Valid Contacts 102

Operating code of practice for 50 MHz operators 102


50 MHz as a DX band 102
Band plan 102
Local QSO's 102
Learn to listen 102
50.100 - 50.130 MHz window for intercontinental contacts 102
50.110 MHz Intercontinental calling frequency 102
50.110 MHz CQ'ing 102
QSO techniques 102
DX pile-up operating 102
Split frequency operation 102
Duplicate QSO’s 103
Telegraphy operation 103
FM QSO’s in Europe 103
Mutual interference 103

Operating procedures for Meteor Scatter QSO's 103


Introduction 103
Scheduled and Random Contacts 103
Timing 103
Transmit periods 104
QSO duration 104
Frequencies 104
QSY frequencies for MGM 104
QSO procedure 105
Valid contacts 106
Additional information for communication before and during the MS QSO 106

QSO Procedure for Airplane Reflections 107

VHF Handbook 9.00 9/180


IARU-R1
Calling 107
Reporting system 107
Reporting procedure 107
Confirmation procedure 107
Requirements for a complete QSO 107

Rapid Deployment Amateur Radio (RaDAR) 108


Introduction 108
The concept 108
Modes of communication 108
Summary 108

Operating practice for digital modes 109


Guidelines for Packet Radio Operators 109
Guidelines for Packet Radio Bulletin Board Operators 109
Guidelines for APRS 109

AMATEUR SATELLITTES 110

Introduction 110

IARU Region 1 and IARU Satellite Coordination 110


General 110
Satellites transmitting on Amateur bands with undocumented protocols or without permission 110

Amateur Satellite Names 111

Amateur-satellite operating practice 111

Amateur Satellite Band Plan Usage 112

Satellite Transponder Designations 113

Amateur Satellite Organisations 114

Current Satellites 114

SIGNAL REPORTING SYSTEM 115

Signal reporting ( Recommendation R.1; R.2) 115


IARU Region 1 Technical Recommendation S-METER READINGS 115
IARU Region 1 Technical Recommendation TONE REPORTS 116

The RSQ (Readability Strength Quality) reporting scale for digital modes: 116
Readability (% of text) 116
Strength 116
Quality 116

The MOS (Mean Opinion Score) reporting scale for digitized speech: 117

THE LOCATOR SYSTEM 118

Background 118

VHF Handbook 9.00 10/180


IARU-R1
Updating the Definition of the IARU locator 118

Definition of the original IARU locator 118

Problems with the Existing Scheme 119

New Higher Resolutions 119

Mapping and Accuracy 120

Proposals to Clarify and Standardise the IARU Locator, including higher Accuracy positioning 120

ANTENNA POLARISATION ( RECOMMENDATION P.1.) 121

IARU-R1 1 Technical Recommendation (Signal Polarisation) 121


Standards for signal polarisation 121

DEFINITION FOR PING AND BURST FOR SCIENTIFIC ANALYSIS OF


AMATEUR RADIO METEOR SCATTER 122

Definitions 122

Background: 122

Aid for defining underdense and overdense trails 123


Maximum duration of an underdense reflection (ping): 123
References: 123

FREQUENCY MODULATED TELEPHONY 124

The basic FM standard (Recommendation FM.1.) 124


IARU Region 1 Technical Recommendation FM.1 124

FM Repeaters ( Recommendation FM.2.) 125


IARU Region 1 Technical Recommendation FM.24 125
CTCSS frequencies Hz to be used for repeater access 126
DTMF frequency pairs 127

DIGITAL TRANSMISSIONS 128

Principles for digital modes 128

Packet-radio (mailbox) operating practice 128

Concerning the relaying of messages to amateur stations 129

Concerning guidelines for packet radio 130

IPv6 allocation 131

Digital voice 132

VHF Handbook 9.00 11/180


IARU-R1
AMATEUR TELEVISION 133

FM-ATV (Recommendation V.2. ) 133

BEACON REQUIREMENTS 134

Beacon message 134

Operation 135

Beacons spectrum 136

Status 136

PROPAGATION RESEARCH BY AMATEURS 137

Introduction 137

Coordination of amateur participation in propagation research 138


Sporadic-E investigations 138
Auroral propagation 139
Tropospheric propagation studies 139
Information exchange programme 139
Co-operation with CCIR study groups and publications 139
Action/support required from IARU Region 1 member societies 140
Cooperation with the DUBUS magazine 140
Propagation database 140

VHF/UHF/µWAVES RECORDS 141

PART 5: ARCHIVES

LIST OF CHANGES 143

IARU INFORMATION 145

IARU Region 1 VHF/UHF/µWaves Committee 145


Constitution and terms of reference of the IARU-R1 VHF/UHF/µWaves Commitee 145
Constitution and Bye-Laws of the IARU Region 1 145
Constitution and Bye-Laws of the IARU 145

IARU Region 1 Conferences 146

IARU Region 1 VHF/UHF/Microwaves Committee Chairs 146

Notes on tasks IARU-R1 and its VHF/UHF/µWaves committee 147


Resolution 91-1 (concerning the improper use of the amateur bands) 148

VHF Handbook 9.00 12/180


IARU-R1
Deleted functions 149
Frequency allocations coordinator 149
Database keeper 150

BEACONS 151

IARU R-1 VHF and µWave beacon list (deleted in Landshut 17) 151

BANDPLANNING 152

Historical data 152

Deleted during the Landshut conference (2017) 153


50 MHz 153
144 MHz 153
432 MHz 154

Deleted during the Virtual conference (2020) 154


DATV & SATV in the 435 MHz Band (Varna 2014) 154
Footnotes 430 Mhz band 154

CONTESTING 155

History 155

Organisation 155

Financing the contest robot (deleted during VGC 2020) 156

Procedure 156
Information 156
Organisation 156
Timing 156
Flow chart contest evaluation 157

Rules 158
All-band sub-regional contests 158
Microwave contest 158
Experiment with scoring system: Locator bonuses 159
Introduction of locator bonus in contests 159
Information exchange on contests 159

VHF/UHF/µWave Challenge trophies and medals: history and winners 160

Rules until 2017 162


Definitions 162
5.7.1.1 Station: 162
5.7.1.2 Location: 162
5.7.1.3 Call Sign: 162
5.7.1.4 • Operator: 162
5.7.1.5 Multi operator: 162
5.7.1.6 Single operator: 162
Eligible entrants (2017) 162
Contest sections 162

VHF Handbook 9.00 13/180


IARU-R1
Contest sections 163
50/70 MHz Contest: 163
145 MHz contest: 163
UHF/Microwaves Contest: 163
6 HOURS section time rule: 163
Operating 164
Date of contests 164
Duration of contests 164
Contacts 164
Type of emission 165
Contest exchanges 165

Contest exchanges 165


Scoring 165
Entries 166
Judging of entries 166
Use of secondary means 166
Awards 166
Logs 167

What needs to be logged? 167

MGM Contest exchange procedures (deleted by the contest working group 2021) 167
Standard Exchange 167
Responding to CQ (as sent in Tx6 above) 168
Notes: 168

List of member societies charged with organising the IARU-R1contests 170

LOCATOR SYSTEM 172

History 172

Description of the Locator system 173

Basis for determination of locators 173

Extended locator system 175

DIGITAL COMMUNICATION 176

Data-transmission ( Recommendations D.1.1. and D.1.2.) - removed 176


IARU Region 1 Technical Recommendation D.1.1 176
IARU Region 1 Technical Recommendation D.1.2 176

Digital telephony ( Recommendation D.2.) (removed DAVOS 2005) 177

Vestigial Sideband AM ( Recommendation V.1.1.) 177

Medium bandwidth ATV ( Recommendation V.1.2.) 177

IARU Region 1 technical recommendations concerning ATV 177


IARU Region 1 Technical Recommendation BASIC FAST SCAN AMATEUR TV STANDARD 177
IARU REGION 1 TECHNICAL RECOMMENDATION SATV 177
IARU Region 1 Technical Recommendation V.3 178

VHF Handbook 9.00 14/180


IARU-R1
IARU Region 1 Technical Recommendation V.2 for Microwave ATV 178
IARU Region 1 Technical Recommendation for Digital ATV 179

VHF Handbook 9.00 15/180


IARU-R1

PART 1
IARU-R1 VHF & UP ORGANISATION

VHF Handbook 9.00 16/180


IARU-R1

ORGANISATION
Constitution of the IARU Region 1 VHF/UHF/Microwaves Committee
The following articles in the IARU Region 1 Constitution and Bye-laws relate to the permanent IARU
Region 1 VHF/UHF/Microwaves Committee

In the Constitution:

A.1.4.7 Definition of specialised bodies


A.5 Nomination, period of office etc. of specialised bodies

N.B. Article A4.11 allows the IARU Region 1 Executive Committee to invite the Chairmen of the
permanent HF and VHF/UHF/Microwaves Committees to their meetings - as has been the custom since
1975.

In the Bye-laws:

B.1.14 Steering Committee at Conferences: membership Chairmen Permanent Committees B.1.18


Function of Permanent VHF/UHF/Microwaves Committee
B.3.10-29 Procedures for set-up and work of Permanent Specialised Bodies

N.B. Section B.1. of the Bye-laws deals with the procedures for organising a General Conference.
Especially the articles dealing with the submission of papers containing proposals and of papers only
containing information merit attention!

Delegates to the IARU Region 1 VHF/UHF/Microwaves Committee should be national VHF Managers
and/or members of their national VHF Committee or equivalent body.

For the office of Chairman of the IARU Region 1 VHF/UHF/Microwaves Committee an amateur who is not
a national VHF Manager nor a member of a national VHF Committee or equivalent body is eligible,
provided he has previously been a member of the IARU Region 1 VHF/UHF/Microwaves Committee, but
only for a period of six years from the time he is no longer the VHF Manager or member of the VHF
Committee or equivalent body of his society1.

At the IARU Region 1 Conference in Noordwijkerhout (1987) the following recommendation was adopted:
In view of the heavy work pressure and many items to be discussed the IARU Region 1
VHF/UHF/Microwaves Committee should have annual meetings (i.e. two meetings between successive
IARU Region 1 General Conferences) (1).
A list of members of the IARU Region 1 VHF/UHF/Microwaves Committee is given in section Ig.

1
Wording brought in accordance with the IARU Region 1 Constitution adopted at the IARU Region 1
Conference in Noordwijkerhout (1987).
VHF Handbook 9.00 17/180
IARU-R1

Terms of reference of the IARU Region 1 VHF/UHF/Microwaves Committee


The tasks of the IARU Region 1 VHF/UHF/Microwaves Committee are:
To co-ordinate the activities of amateurs in IARU Region 1 with respect to frequency allocations above 30
MHz.
To ensure that adequate use is made of existing allocations and to consider possible new allocations.
To co-ordinate and promote scientific investigations by member societies of IARU Region 1 on all
frequencies above 30 MHz.
To recommend IARU Region 1 individual bandplans aimed at promoting greater effectiveness both for
local and long distance communications.
To encourage special projects on the frequency allocations above 30 MHz aimed at advancing amateur
radio communication techniques, e.g. amateur satellite projects.
To assist in the protection of the amateur allocations above 30 MHz from possible loss by stimulating
activity and demonstrating the effective use by amateurs (see note below).
To plan and conduct IARU Region 1 VHF/UHF/Microwaves contests and to coordinate sub-regional
contests on these bands.
To advise on interference problems especially relating to the VHF/UHF/Microwaves bands.

Exchange of information will be provided by:-


• complimentary exchange of society journals between VHF Managers, already decided upon at the
IARU Region 1 Conference in Lausanne (1953);
• the Region 1 News bulletin produced by the Secretary of IARU Region 1;
• a Newsletter by the Chairman of the IARU Region 1 VHF/UHF/Microwaves Committee for urgent
items.

VHF Handbook 9.00 18/180


IARU-R1

Tasks of IARU R-1 and its VHF/UHF/µWave Committee


The IARU and their regional organisations are the officially accredited representative of the Amateur
Service and the Amateur Satellite Service at the International Telecommunications Union (ITU) and all
their organisations and Conferences, like, for instance, the WARC's.

Apart from the contributions IARU Region 1 and its officers make to the above work, IARU Region 1
specifically represents the amateur interests at, amongst others, the Conference of European Post and
Telecommunications Administrations (CEPT) and their European Radiocommunications Office (ERO) in
Copenhagen, as well as at the European Union (EU) in Brussels.

The coordination of the representative work done by the IARU Region 1 is in the hands of the member of
the IARU Region 1 Executive Committee, Don Beattie G3BJ

The most important tasks of the IARU and their regional organisations are:
to defend, extend and upgrade the status of the frequency segments allocated by the ITU to the Amateur
Service and the Amateur Satellite Service;
to coordinate the orderly use of the frequency bands allocated to the Amateur service and the Amateur
Satellite Service by the ITU and the national Administrations by careful bandplanning.

The supporting role of the IARU Region 1 VHF/UHF/Microwaves Committee with respect to the above
tasks is clearly set out in the Terms of Reference of this Committee, given in PART 1 section 1.7 and 1.8 .

The defence, extension and management of the allocations above 30 MHz has been the subject of the
following recommendations adopted by the IARU Region 1 on the basis of proposals brought forward by
the IARU Region 1 VHF/UHF/Microwaves Committee. At the IARU Region 1 Conference in Scheveningen
(1972) the following recommendation was adopted:-
Member societies are strongly recommended to establish and maintain contact with their national
Administrations at a policy level to ensure that the case for amateur radio in the VHF/UHF/Microwaves
bands is properly known and can effectively be presented by each Administration at future frequency
allocation Conferences. VHF Managers are to see that the Councils of their societies pursue this policy
and will ensure that the Secretary of IARU Region 1 is kept informed of developments with national
Administrations.

VHF Handbook 9.00 19/180


IARU-R1

Microwave managers Sub-committee


At the IARU Region I Conference in Warsaw (1975) the following recommendation was adopted :
VHF managers will stimulate national interest in the 1 - 30 GHz microwave bands. In addition, DARC will
direct special attention to the 2.3 GHz band and RSGB to the 10 GHz band by publishing information on
the design of suitable equipment and on results achieved on these bands.

At the meeting of the VHF Working Group in Amsterdam (October 1976) it was agreed that all societies
should nominate a person to act as focal point for the reception and distribution of microwave information
and material. The names of the persons to act in this way should be sent to the Secretary of IARU Region
I. Furthermore, any changes in focal points should immediately be advised to the Secretary of Region I. All
focal points would investigate the possibility of starting microwave columns in the journal of their national
society.

Since the above recommendations were adopted, in several societies these focal points have developed
into full-fledged Microwave Managers running their own microwave column in their society's journal.

During sessions of the IARU Region 1 VHF/UHF/Microwaves Committee at Region 1 Conferences as well
as meetings of the VHF/UHF/Microwaves Committee in the years between Conferences a sub-committee
of Microwave Managers pre-advises ( when requested by the meeting ) on matters concerning microwave
frequencies. For this purpose the frequency of 1 GHz has been adopted as the lower microwave boundary
(Brighton, 1981).

A list of Microwave Managers can be found in PART 1 section 1.8

VHF Handbook 9.00 20/180


IARU-R1

Coordinators of the VHF/UHF/Microwaves Committee


VHF Contest Coordinator
It is proposed to create a team of experienced VHF contesters and contest robot owners/designers to
define common checking rules for automatic contest adjudication applications coordinated by the Contest
coordinator (Landshut 2017) see also PART 3

Satellite coordinator
Amateur Satellite activities are predominantly taking place in the VHF, UHF and Microwave bands. The
Region 1 VHF/UHF/Microwave Committee therefore, has to take the Amateur Satellite Service into
account in all aspects of its work.
In Region 1 (and in other Regions as well) specialist groups in many countries deal with amateur satellite
matters and the communication between the (representative of) the member societies and those groups is
not always optimum.
Within the IARU there exists a Satellite Advisor function but his tasks are mostly oriented towards
worldwide coordination. The VHF/UHF/Microwaves Committee, therefore, decided at its meeting in
Lillehammer 1999 to create the function of Region 1 VHF/UHF/Microwaves Satellite Coordinator.
The tasks of the coordinator are:
To liaise
1. with all groups which specialise in amateur satellite matters in Region 1 countries,
2. with the IARU Satellite Advisor and
3. with all other relevant people/organizations.
To inform the committee about all satellite matters relevant to its work by:-
4. Maintaining the Amateur Satellite section of the VHF Managers Handbook,
5. Contributing to the VHF Newsletter
6. Contributing to meetings of the committee.
The coordinator, therefore, should preferably
be an active and recognized operator in the amateur satellite service
have a good knowledge of English ( speaking and writing)
have the support of the IARU member society in his country ( preferably being a member of his societies
delegation to meetings of the committee)
Beacon coordinator
See point 5
Propagations coordinators
Ionospheric Propagation Coordinator - t.b.f.
Auroral Propagation Coordinator - t.b.f.
Tropospheric Propagation coordinator - t.b.f.
Records coordinator
The VUSHF DX Records Homepage has been moved to http://dxrecords.vushf.dk (Varna 2014)
Repeater coordinator
His task is to keep the information up to date about IARU-R1 repeaters on the IARU website. National
societies should provide their information to him. (Varna 2014)

IARU R-1 Executive Committee


For actual contact information please visit: http://www.iaru-r1.org (About IARU Region 1 -> Executive
Committee)

VHF Handbook 9.00 21/180


IARU-R1
Actual IARU-R1 VHF/UHF/SHF Chairman, Co-ordinators and co-
workers
Chairman Dick Harms, PA2DW pa2dw@veron.nl
The Netherlands

Vice Chairman Jann Traschewski DG8NGN dg8ngn@darc.de


Germany

VHF/UHF/Microwave Alessandro Carletti, IV3KKW iv3kkw@gmail.com


Contest Coordinator Italy

VHF/UHF/Microwave Matthias Klug DH4FAJ dh4faj@darc.de


Beacons Coordinator Germany

Region 1 Satellite Graham Shirville, G3VZV g3vzv@amsat.org


Coordinator England

Spectrum expert Murray Niman, G6JYB g6jyb@microwavers.org


England

VHF/UHF/Microwave Kjeld Bülow Thomsen OZ1FF kjeld@oz1ff.dk


Records Keeper Denmark

Repeater information Mats Espling SM6EAN sm6ean@ssa.se


Coordinator Sweden

Secretary Jacques Verleijen, ON4AVJ on4avj@uba.be

VHF Handbook 9.00 22/180


IARU-R1
National VHF managers
This is the situation after the virtual Conference, to see the actual situation, please look at the IARU-R1
website.

Alois W. Buchel HB0MUO AFVL Liechtenstein


Jean Jacques Niava TU2OP ARAI Côte d’Ivoire jjniava@comete.ci
Arman Destanovic E77P ARABiH Bosnia
Alessandro
Carletti IV3KKW ARI Italy iv3kkw@gmail.com
Victor Marinov LZ1NY BFRA Bulgaria lz1ny@bfra.org
Christis
Christodoulou 5B4SN CARS Cyprus vhfmanager@cyhams.org
Petr Kasparek OK2ULQ CRC Czech Republic ok2ulq@seznam.cz
Jann Traschewski DG8NGN DARC Germany dg8ngn@darc.de
Sayed Abdel Samie SU1SA ERASD Egypt kh_sayed@yahoo.com.
Ivan Stauning OZ7IS EDR Denmark oz7is@edr.dk
Mart Tagasaar ES2NJ ERAU Estonia es2nj@erau.ee
Ciorovan Claudiu YO4FYQ FRR Romania yo4fyq@yahoo.com
Zeljko Drazic Karalic 9A5R HRS Republic of Croatia 9a5r@hamradio.hr
Dan Katzman 4Z5SL IARC Israel dkatzman@shamir.co.il
Joe Fadden EI3IX IRTS Ireland joe_fadden@yahoo.com
Vitautis Klimavicus YL3AG LRAL Latvia lral@acad.latnet.lv
Andy Sharpilo LY2HQ LRMD Lithuania ly2hq@lrmd.lt
Philip Aquilina 9H1PA MARL Malta phillipa@maltanet.net
Joe Devenyi HA0LC MRASZ Hungary joe@anico.hu
Hans Utne LA6IM NRRL Norway vhfmanager@nrrl.no
Thomas Ostermann OE7OST ÖVSV Austria oe7ost@oevsv.at
Piotr Szolkowski SP5QAT PZK Poland pszolkowski@extremenetworks.com
Costas.Fimerelis SV1DH RAAG Greece sv1dh@otenet.gr
Philippe Martin F6ETI REF France f6eti@wanadoo.fr
Carlos Nora CT1END REP Portugal ct1end@gmail.com
Jeng Jungels RL Luxemburg iaruvhf@rlx.lu
John Regnault G4SWX RSGB United Kingdom john.regnault@btinternet.com
Nasser al Rwawahi Sultanate of Oman roars@omantel.net.om
Todorovski Todor Z31RM RSM Macedonia Z31RM@mt.net.mk
Rasto Hrnko OM3BH SARA Slovakia om3bh@centrum.sk
Riaan Greeff ZS4PR SARL South Africa vubandplanning@sarl.org.za
Jussi Liukkonen OH5LK SRAL Finland oh5lk@sral.fi
Miki Markovic YU1AU SRJ Serbia
Mats Espling SM6EAN SSA Sweden sm6ean@ssa.se
Dmitry Dmitriev RA3AQ SRR Russia ra3aq@vhfdx.ru
Oguzhan Kayhan TA2NC TRAC Turkey oguzhan@kayhan.name.tr
Yuri Gorets UT5EL UARL Ukraine ut5el@mail.ru
Stefan Dombrowski ON6TI UBA Belgium ON6TI@uba.be
VHF Handbook 9.00 23/180
IARU-R1
Xavier Perez C31PM URA Principat d'Andorra ura@andorra.ad
Anibal Garcia EA1ASC URE Spain ea1asc@ure.es
Hans-Peter Strub HB9DRS USKA Switzerland vhf@uska.ch
Rob Hardenberg PE1ITR VERON The Netherlands voorzitter.vhf-en-hoger@veron.nl
Miha Habic S51FB ZRS Slovenia s51fb@slovhf.net

VHF Handbook 9.00 24/180


IARU-R1

Microwave managers
This is the situation after the virtual Conference, to see the actual situation, please look at the IARU-R1
website.

František Stihavka, OK1CA CRC Czech Republic


Kjeld Bülow Thomsen OZ1FF EDR Denmark kjeld@oz1ff.dk
Joe Fadden EI3IX IRTS Ireland joe_fadden@yahoo.com
Stefan Heck LA0BY NNRL Norway microwavemanager@nrrl.no
Fred Kuneth OE8FNK ÖVSV Austria microwave@oevsv.at
Sylvain AZARIAN F4GKR REF France
Barry Lewis G4SJH RSGB United Kingdom barryplewis@btinternet.com
Jari Koivurinne OH3UW SRAL Finland oh3uw@sral.fi
Jens Tunare SM6AFV SSA Sweden jens.tunare@gmail.se
Peter Pauwels ON7BPS UBA Belgium on7bps@telenet.be

Note.
If a member society has not nominated a Microwave Manager, the VHF Manager may be assumed to be
also responsible for microwave matters.

VHF Handbook 9.00 25/180


IARU-R1

RECOMMENDATIONS FOR VHF MANAGERS


Actions needed to protect the 23cm band in WRC 2023(VGC 2020)
This important paper was introduced by Barry Lewis G4SJH who coordinates the IARU effort for
WRC23 Agenda Item 9.1(b) concerning the 23cm band:

The following actions should be taken to fully underpin the IARU volunteer team effort
addressing the potential WRC-23 related threats to the amateur services in the 1240-
1300MHz band. Coexistence between the amateur and amateur satellite services and the
radio navigation satellite service has become a global ITU-R topic relevant across the
entire IARU:
• Member Societies actively take action to engage with their national administration to promote the IARU
position on the development of the regional CEPT and global ITU-R regulatory deliverables.
• Member Societies promote the views of their national amateur community with their national administration.
• Member Societies actively engage in setting the national and regional brief for the regulatory and ITU-R
preparatory work that will take place in all RTO’s across all Regions.
• Member Societies proactively engage with their national administration and RTO’s regarding progress of the
work regionally and globally.
• Member Societies remain vigilant and ready to react to any early proposals to downgrade (or remove) the
national amateur services allocations in their respective countries ahead of the conclusion of the regulatory
work.
• Member Societies widely publicise the amateur community views (both the IARU position and their national
amateur community) – e.g. national newsletters etc.
• Member Societies take these actions urgently.
• Member Societies should report back to IARU R1 SRLC on a regular basis or as appropriate.

Protect our amateur bands(Landshut 2017)


General
All IARU bodies and member societies use every opportunity to exert pressure on national regulators to
implement all the recommendations that protect the amateur bands.
24 and 47 GHz band
In order to protect the 24 and 47 GHz band it is recommended that:
• IARU member societies fully engage with their national administrations to ensure they are fully
aware of the radio amateur interest in their countries in the 24 GHz and 47 GHz bands.
• IARU member societies ensure their national administrations actively support the protection of the
amateur radio services in the 24 GHz and 47 GHz bands in the WRC-19 preparatory studies.
• IARU member societies encourage their national interest groups to publicise and highlight their
achievements in these frequency bands (including by web pages, social media, YouTube, etc.)
Millimetre bands
In order to protect and develop the use of the millimetre wave bands it is recommended that Member
Societies should;
• recognise the importance of the millimetre wave frequency bands as territory for experimentation
and innovation.
• recognise that the ability to exploit these frequencies reflects the true amateur radio spirit of self-
learning and training.

VHF Handbook 9.00 26/180


IARU-R1
• encourage national interest-group organisations to provide a forum for efficient sharing of
experiences and ideas amongst their amateur communities for the use of these bands.
• facilitate the organisation of events and meetings (including contests) that can allow like-minded
enthusiasts to exchange ideas.
• take steps to highlight and promote activity and experimentation in this area with their national and
regional administrations.

50 MHz Band
That work start immediately to review the 50 MHz band plan, in the light of emerging new requirements
(including digital wideband applications), with the intention to present proposals for a new bandplan to the
General Conference in 2020, including the impact of any outcome from WRC19.

Defending the bands from 1 GHz to 10 GHz (Vienna 2019)


Introduction
The growth in consumer and commercial wireless applications is putting increasing
pressure on all the microwave amateur service bands above 1GHz. Many of the
amateur service allocations have a secondary status in the international regulatory
framework which leaves them particularly vulnerable in the face of concerted
commercial and political pressure.
For amateurs, the lower microwave bands provide a springboard for developing
interest and skills in the use of higher bands. Modern components, sub-systems,
surplus equipment and software radio technology have improved their accessibility
for experimentation and operation of high-performance amateur systems.
Actions
Member Societies are encouraged to raise the profile of microwave and millimetre wave band operation in
the context of experimentation and innovation in amateur radio activity.
The following recommendations are proposed for ALL Member Societies:
• Appoint a specific microwave manager to help raise the profile of the interest in these bands.
(The latest VHF Handbook currently lists just 8).
• Engage closely with the activities of national administrations (e.g replying to consultations and
attending workshops) relating to national spectrum management of the bands above 1GHz.
• Member Societies should drive a position with their administration that unrestricted amateur
services can successfully share spectrum with commercial users as demonstrated already in
some bands.
• Engage closely with national administrations to ensure that amateur stakeholder interests feed
into international spectrum management developments.
• Ensure that national administrations are aware of the interest and opportunity these bands
provide for experimentation, training and learning.
• Provide incentives to individuals and clubs to encourage construction and operation in these
bands (e.g. awards, publicity).
• Ensure national administrations understand the importance that the range of amateur allocated
frequency bands provides in enabling differing opportunities and challenges for amateur activities.
• Be ready to question any unreasonable national restrictions on amateur usage that appear
disproportionate or unrealistic.

Licenced share access (LSA)


IARU Region 1 needs to create guidance and prerequisites on how Licence Share Access (LSA) may work
in an Amateur Radio context. This can support member societies to prepare for future national discussions
where LSA is proposed to be the future way for am-ateur radio to retain access to spectrum.

VHF Handbook 9.00 27/180


IARU-R1

Band activity survey


It is recommended that a task group is formed within the C5 Committee to compile a survey of actual band
usage and activity above 148 MHz, as requested by the IARU AC, to ensure it is completed by all the
Member Societies and send the conclusions to IARU AC by the be-ginning of 2018 to update the IARU
database of band usage for use in ITU discussions.

Proper use of amateur frequencies (Cavtat 2008)


Member Societies are recommended to promote the proper use of amateur frequencies consistent with the
international Radio Regulations, with a view toward maintaining the integrity of the amateur service and its
frequency allocations as well as promoting the success of amateur satellite activities in their country.
Satellite frequency coordination (Cavtat 2008)
Member Societies are recommended to work closely with the IARU Satellite Adviser and his Advisory
Panel, and with their national administrations, with respect to requests for satellite frequency coordination
originating in their respective countries.

145MHz for satellite downlinks (Cavtat 2008)


The presence of interfering non-amateur signals in the 145.80-146.00MHz part of this band, in many parts
of the world, is well documented. To prevent the retransmission of interfering terrestrial signals, satellites in
the Amateur Satellite Service that plan to use the 145MHz Amateur band for transponders, are
encouraged to use this band for downlink (satellite to ground) modes only, regardless of modulation type.

Multi-Band beacon clusters (Cavtat 2008)


National Societies should encourage the deployment of multi-band beacon clusters covering low VHF
between about 30 MHz and about 70 MHz.
Deployed beacon clusters should wherever possible provide signals at around 40 MHz and around 60
MHz.
Amateurs should be encouraged to set up and maintain automated monitoring stations and to contribute
the measurement results to the community.
A common transmission format should be adopted to aid the reception of multiple clusters

3400-3410MHz allocation
National Societies should take all necessary steps in seeking 3400-3410MHz allocations on a Secondary
non-interference basis as quickly as possible.
All Societies should explicitly include the Amateur Satellite Service (both SAT-Earth and Earth-SAT) in
such requests on the basis that many years of terrestrial and EME operations (notably in the CEPT area)
have not resulted in interference reports from other users.
National Societies and IARU–R1 should collaborate more closely to assist those Societies who in the past
have not been able to achieve such allocations.
Societies should collectively obtain a critical mass of national allocations so that footnotes in regional
allocation tables can be extended or acquired that include the Amateur Satellite Service
IARU-R1 to prioritise this band and to take active steps in support of these goals

Contest Log exchange


National VHF Managers or properly nominated Contest Committees should send the electronic contest log
data entries from IARU R1 contests to a special web page to allow an exchange of logs for more accurate
national evaluation (http://iaru.oevsv.at/v_upld/prg_list.php).

VHF Handbook 9.00 28/180


IARU-R1
DX code of conduct (Varna 2014)
It is recommended that member societies endorse and promote the “DX Code of Conduct for
DXpeditions” published on http://www.dx-code.org/

TV Repeater Transmissions (Varna 2014)


In any band where there is serious compatibility issue, TV Repeater Outputs must minimise their
overall transmissions to reduce the potential for interference.

In such bands, continuous beacon or testcard transmissions are a particular problem and should be
phased out in favour of short regular transmissions or transmit-on-demand.

Remote Controlled Operation (Varna 2014)


Remote controlled operation is defined to mean operation where a licensed operator controls an amateur
radio station from a remote control terminal.

Where a station is operated remotely, the following conditions shall apply:


Remote operation must be permitted, or not objected to, by the Regulatory Authority of the country where
the station is located.
The call sign to be used should be the call sign issued by the Regulatory Authority of the country in which
the station is located. This applies irrespective of the location of the operator.
It should be noted that Recommendation SC11_C4_07 states that member societies bring to their
members attention that the T/R 61-01 agreement only applies to people using their own call sign, with the
appropriate country prefix, when the operator is actually visiting that country, not for remote operation.
Any further requirements regarding the participation of remotely controlled stations in contests or award
programmes are a matter for the various contest or award programme organisers.
Note: CEPT T/R 61-01 can be found at http://www.erodocdb.dk/docs/doc98/official/pdf/TR6101.pdf

Information about repeaters


It is recommended that all repeater information should be found on the IARU R1 website, or by a link from
the IARU R1 website. Member societies should send their information to SM6EAN (Varna 2014)

VHF Handbook 9.00 29/180


IARU-R1
IARU R-1 AND IARU SATELLITE COORDINATION
ITU Notification Requirements for Amateur Satellites
Background
In recent years there has been a dramatic increase in the number of satellites being launched which
operate on frequencies in the Amateur Satellite Service.

The Amateur Satellite Service has different and less onerous notification and registration requirements
than most other Satellite services. However it has been noted that many satellites have not actually been
notified to the ITU at all. This has led to their records of frequency usage, which are often examined by
other services, providing an incomplete picture to our possible detriment. This section shows the correct
procedure which should be followed for all such projects.
It should be noted that this ITU procedure should proceed in parallel with the IARU Frequency
Coordination process which is still required. All member societies are requested to familiarise themselves
with this procedure and to encourage/ensure that satellite builders in their country follow the process.

Procedure
The Potential Amateur Satellite Builder
• A potential amateur satellite builder is required to inform their National Telecommunications
Regulatory Authority about their planned satellite project.

The Regulatory Authority


• Verifies that the project is in accordance of Article-25 and other provision of the Radio Regulations
(RR)
• Checks if the satellite, telemetry and command ground station(s) will be operating under valid
amateur licenses
• In cooperation with the responsible amateur licence holder, submits the required API (Advanced
Publication Information) information to the ITU (Bureau) – see the required data in the wizard at:
• http://www.itu.int/ITU-R/space/support/ARS/ARS-APIhelp.pdf
• It is only necessary to send general orbital characteristics, frequency bands (not exact
frequencies), emissions, service area, antenna diagrams and some other data – see the wizard.
• The Bureau will publish, based on the API data from the Regulatory Authority, an API/A special
section to inform all administrations about the project
• At the same time (as submitting the API to the Bureau), or preferably earlier, the responsible
amateur license holder should contact the IARU Satellite Adviser and submit all required
information for the IARU amateur satellite frequency coordination process. See the information at
http://www.iaru.org/satellite/
• The National Regulatory Authority (with help of the Bureau) has to solve any API potential
problems (for example exclusion of country from the service area of the satellite) and the Bureau
will publish it in API/B publication.
• When the IARU amateur satellite frequency coordination is completed the IARU Satellite
Frequency Coordinator informs the responsible amateur license holder of the coordinated
frequencies and some other (if necessary) conditions/restrictions.
• If all is in order, the National Regulatory Authority, in cooperation with the Satellite builder, submits
the required notification data to the Bureau using SpaceCap software (see CR/303 for details) –
more detailed data, including EXACT frequency assignments (notification wizard is under
preparation)
• The Satellite has to be operational within 7 years from the date of the receipt of the API information.
Notification shall reach the Bureau not earlier than 3 years before the satellite is operational. The
Bureau will publish, based on the notification data, a PART I-S publication – acknowledgment

VHF Handbook 9.00 30/180


IARU-R1
• The Bureau will publish the result, in its technical and regulatory examinations and findings, in
PART II-S publication – resulting in INTERNATIONAL RECOGNITION and RECORDING of the
satellite in the Space Master Register following all regulatory requirements of the Radio
Regulations

IARU-AC 89-3 concerning amateur satellite usage


The IARU Administrative Council, Orlando, September 1989, recognised the important contributions made
by amateur societies in the following areas:
• demonstration to the professional community that radio amateurs contribute to the development of
state-of-the-art technology and techniques
• provision of new and challenging operational opportunities and training ground for radio amateurs
to acquire new skills
• providing opportunities for training in an exciting technological field by direct participation, in
schools, universities and professional organisations, and
• stimulating the interest of young people in a worthwhile activity, and encouraging the pursuit of a
technological career to provide the next generation of industrial and research engineers.

Wishing to stimulate the growth of the Amateur Satellite Service in an orderly manner, the Administrative
Council strongly supports the following goals:
• the encouragement of a wide dynamic range of activities stimulating training through increasing
intellectual challenge
• the stimulation of young people in schools and universities to develop an interest in amateur radio
through participation in amateur satellite activities
• where allowed, the provision of emergency services, especially to parts of the world that are less
technologically developed, and
• the adoption of a "code of practice" that ensures the use of amateur frequency allocations by satellites
in accordance with the spirit and ethos of amateur radio.
The Administrative Council resolved that:
• Member societies shall make Administrations more aware of the value and achievements of the
Amateur Satellite Service.
• Satellites operating within amateur frequency allocations shall carry payloads and experiments that
are relevant to, of interest to and available for participation by radio-amateurs worldwide.
• Operational frequencies of amateur satellites shall be in accordance with all applicable IARU band
plans
• The use of higher frequency bands by amateur satellites shall be encouraged

VHF Handbook 9.00 31/180


IARU-R1
Terms of reference of the IARU satellite adviser
General:
An advisory and representational role, requiring technical knowledge and good interpersonal skills.

Function
To keep the Administrative Council informed on all technical and operational aspects of the amateur-
satellite service, and to provide advice and assistance to enable the Council to adopt appropriate policies,
and also to better inform the satellite community of the IARU.

Appointment:
The IARU Satellite Adviser shall be appointed by the Administrative Council and the position, the
appointment and these terms of reference shall continue until the next meeting of the Administrative
Council, which may or may not reconfirm this position, the appointment and these terms of reference.

Tasks:
• Report to the Administrative Council, providing information as to all developments in the satellite
area, including all planned amateur satellites.
• At the request of the Administrative Council, provide technical and operational advice to assist the
representation of the amateur-satellite service to the ITU.
• And attend such meetings of the satellite community as are appropriate.
• Represent generally the IARU to the satellite community and particularly to new or non-AMSAT
satellite groups.
• To consult with and liaise with the satellite community as appropriate.
• To appoint any assistants that may be required.

VHF Handbook 9.00 32/180


IARU-R1
Terms of reference of the IARU AMSAT satellite frequency
coordinator
General
The IARU AMSAT (Amateur Satellite) Frequency Coordinator (IAFC) is an operational role, requiring high
technical competence and a detailed knowledge of amateur satellites, frequency management as well as
of IARU band plans.
Function
The IAFC shall assist the IARU Satellite Adviser and provide a service to enable any group to coordinate
frequencies and emissions of a planned satellite intended to operate on Amateur Frequencies, under the
license from the group's national administration, with existing and other planned amateur satellites.
Appointment
The IAFC is appointed jointly by the IARU Satellite Adviser (ISA) in consultation with the consensus the
recognized AMSAT Groups. The necessary liaison for this purpose with and among AMSAT Groups is to
be conducted at the Annual IARU International Satellite Forum and, between Forum meetings, via Internet
(amsat-international@amsat.org). The IAFC shall report both to the ISA and to the AMSAT Groups.
The appointment is to last until the next Annual IARU International Satellite Forum, at which it may be
reconfirmed or a new appointment made. The ISA after obtaining the concurrence of the AMSAT Groups
as above, may revoke the appointment at any time, and the appointment shall thereupon cease. Any
vacancy in this position, whether by resignation or revocation, shall be filled as soon as possible in the
manner set forth above.
Tasks
• Maintain a data base of all operating and planned satellites on Amateur Frequencies including
frequencies, emissions and orbits.
• Upon request of an individual or group proposing to build a satellite to operate on Amateur
Frequencies, provide information and advice to assist that prospective builder in the choice of
frequencies and modes with the view of minimizing interference.
• Through publicity and direct communication, seek out prospective satellite builders and to
encourage them to make use of this service. This function is jointly shared with the ISA.
• Promptly provide all information required by the ISA.
• After taking into account the input from various experts, it is the IAFC's task to make appropriate
recommendations to the satellite builder(s). The IAFC is supported in this task by the ISA.
• Publish quarterly reports for distribution to the ISA, IARU national Societies and AMSAT Groups.
Distribution to the AMSAT Groups will be considered fulfilled if said reports are posted on the
amsat-international@amsat.org Internet distribution.
• While this position is a technical position, the IAFC has an important role in assisting in the
protection of bands allocated to the amateur satellite service.
• To this end the IAFC is tasked to work with the AMSAT Groups to develop a protection plan which
should be submitted to the IARU Satellite Adviser who's task it is to achieve endorsement from the
IARU Regions and incorporation in band plans.
It is also important that the role of the IAFC is not confused with that of the ISA. To this end:-
• The role of the IAFC is restricted to providing advice as set out above, and in particular shall not
make any statement(s) that could be understood to be expressing IARU policy, which will be the
role of the ISA.
• The IAFC shall promptly inform the ISA of any matters that may affect bands allocated to the
amateur services, particularly the amateur satellite service.
• The IAFC shall work closely with the AMSAT Groups and national IARU Societies as appropriate
while maintaining consistent contact with the ISA and the AMSAT Groups, via Internet.
• The IAFC will be expected to attend the Annual IARU International Satellite Forum and such other
meetings as agreed to, or directed by, the ISA from time to time. However all travel and other

VHF Handbook 9.00 33/180


IARU-R1
expenses associated with such meeting attendance must be budgeted for in advance and is
subject to approval of the ISA who is responsible for the budget.

RELEVANT IARU REGION-1 RECOMMENDATIONS


Recommendation CT08_C5_Rec01
(Paper CT08_C5_03 Support for Satellite Frequency Coordination)
Member Societies are recommended to work closely with the IARU Satellite Adviser and his Advisory
Panel, and with their national administrations, with respect to requests for satellite frequency coordination
originating in their respective countries,

Recommendation CT08_C5_Rec02
(Paper CT08_C5_03 Support for Satellite Frequency Coordination)
Member Societies are recommended to promote the proper use of amateur frequencies consistent with the
international Radio Regulations, with a view toward maintaining the integrity of the amateur service and its
frequency.

Recommendation CT08_C5_Rec22
(Paper CT08_C5_16 Increased Amateur Satellite Service 2 Metre Usage)
The presence of interfering non-amateur signals in the 145.80-146.00MHz part of this band, in many parts
of the world, is well documented. To prevent the retransmission of interfering terrestrial signals, satellites in
the Amateur Satellite Service that plan to use the 145MHz Amateur band for transponders, are
encouraged to use this band for downlink (satellite to ground) modes only, regardless of modulation type

Recommendation CT08_C5_Rec25
(Paper CT08_C5_17 3400MHz Amateur Satellite Allocation)
• National Societies should take all necessary steps in seeking 3400-3410MHz allocations on a
Secondary non-interference basis as quickly as possible.
• All Societies should explicitly include the Amateur Satellite Service (both S-E and E-S) in such
requests on the basis that many years of terrestrial and EME operations (notably in the CEPT area)
have not resulted in interference reports from other users.
• National Societies and IARU–R1 should collaborate more closely to assist those Societies who in
the past have not been able to achieve such allocations.
• Societies should collectively obtain a critical mass of national allocations so that footnotes in
regional allocation tables can be extended or acquired that include the Amateur Satellite Service
• IARU-R1 to prioritise this band and to take active steps in support of these goals
Recommendation CT08_C5_Rec37
(Paper CT08_C5_37 Amateur Satellite Service Spectrum - Vienna 2007)
It is recommended that all IARU Region 1 societies request that the following additional Amateur Satellite
Service bands be studied and considered, perhaps as a package, for a future WRC agenda item:
• 50-51 MHz
• 1240-1250 MHz
• 2300-2330 MHz
• 2390-2400 MHz
• 3400-3410 MHz
• 5650-5670 MHz (Currently Earth-To-Space only)
• 10350-10400 MHz

VHF Handbook 9.00 34/180


IARU-R1

IARU-R1 REPEATER COORDINATION


Coordination of repeater activities
Extensive 145 MHz and 435 MHz repeater networks are operational in Western Europe, and activity on 1.3
GHz is growing.
It is highly important that these developments are internationally guided, so that a coordinated approach is
followed for the benefit of all IARU Region 1 amateurs.

The aim of repeater networks has been defined as follows (see chapter 3.1., Principles of bandplanning):
• FM repeaters provide a communication service to mobile amateur-stations (including hand-held
equipment). In some cases they may be installed to aid the accessibility of stations in mountainous
areas.
• They are not intended to make DX contacts possible, and hence their coverage under normal
propagation conditions should be limited.
• The number of repeater stations installed should be determined by
• the required regional coverage
• the expected number of intended users
• FM repeaters should not regularly be used as local chat channels for fixed (home) stations. This
interferes with their defined use.

Careful bandplanning is required (section 2), as well as timely agreement on the technical specifications of
repeaters and equipment used with repeaters (section 7).
The problem of mutual interference (overlapping coverage pattern) makes it mandatory that in neighbouring
countries the allocations of locations and especially of frequencies are coordinated.

For this reason at the IARU Region 1 Conference in Miskolc-Tapolca (1978) the following recommendation
was adopted:
Coverage measurements shall be made for repeaters planned to be installed. In cases of
international boundary crossing the VHF Managers concerned should co-ordinate repeater
coverage.

A suitable way of presenting the expected coverage, set out in document M/T 59, submitted by ÖVSV, was
recommended for this purpose (see PART 2 section 5.2.3)

VHF Handbook 9.00 35/180


IARU-R1
Repeater coordination: coverage presentation
Introduction
In the event that signals of repeaters or other un-manned stations could cause interference beyond the
boundaries of the country in which they are operating, all designers, constructors and other persons
responsible for such stations are obliged to contact the VHF-UHF-SHF Managers of the neighbouring
countries concerned, in order to avoid such interference by coordinating channel use.

As far as Austria is concerned, the VHF Manager entered all areas from where repeaters might be
operated on a map, so that all repeater problems could be easily be discussed and solutions found. A copy
of such a map, a description of the methods used to prepare such a map, as well as proposed general
rules for the use of repeaters are given below.

General rules for operating via repeaters


Users of repeaters shall limit their transmissions to the shortest necessary time and the stations in QSO
shall not start their transmission before having left some time to give other stations a chance to make
"distress calls", if necessary.

Recommended methods to prepare coverage map


Attached as fig. 1 is an example map showing repeater coverage from some locations in Austria. The
entries should be made in accordance with CCIR recommendation 370-1.
A full line designates the area where during at least 50 % of the time contacts via repeaters can be made by
a mobile station, running 10 Watts into a 5/8 wavelength vertical antenna.
A dotted line designates the area where during 50 % of the time a fixed station with an effective radiated
power of 100 Watts can operate via the repeater.
All locations from where under extraordinary conditions contacts could be made (e.g. mountain tops) should
also be entered.
For the above delineations normal propagation conditions should be taken; contact possibilities via rare
tropospheric conditions or sporadic-E reflections shall be disregarded.
The person(s) responsible for the planned repeater shall prepare a map according to the method outlined
above. This map shall be sent to the national VHF Manager for further (international) co-ordination.
(From document M/T 59, submitted by OeVSV at the IARU Region I Conference in Miskolc-Tapolca, 1978)

VHF Handbook 9.00 36/180


IARU-R1
IARU-R1 BEACON COORDINATION
IARU R1 beacons: a guide to good practice
Beacon transmitters have long been used to indicate the presence of VHF openings and have contributed
significantly to our knowledge of propagation. As the numbers of beacons is increasing rapidly and the
amount of spectrum available for them is under pressure it is important that beacon builders are aware of
the technical parameters required, the reasons for them and the procedure to be followed to obtain an
agreed frequency.

Beacon - A station in the Amateur Service or Amateur-Satellite Service that autonomously transmits in a
defined format, which may include repetitive data or information, for the study of propagation,
determination of frequency or bearing or for other experimental purposes including construction."

It is not intended that this document should specify the exact purpose of any individual beacon, its power
level or the number of beacons in any country, as this should be agreed within the national society
concerned. It is also not intended to be applied rigorously to experimental beacons or beacons with a
special purpose. It should however apply to the vast majority of VHF/UHF/Microwave beacons for
propagation monitoring purposes, as designated by the beacon sections of the bandplans.

Coordination procedure
The existing requirement for co-ordination of regional beacons will be retained. For non-coordinated
beacons the beacon proposal should be agreed with the national society (with consultation with
neighbouring societies where appropriate) and a provisional frequency chosen.

If the beacon has an ERP of greater than 10W then the frequency should be submitted to the IARU Region
1 VHF beacon co-ordinator to check for potential interference problems. Societies should provide regular
and frequent updates to the IARU R1 Beacon coordinator. Beacons or changes to beacons which are not
notified to the coordinator forfeit their arbitration rights in any coordination dispute.

Local Beacons:
In the microwave bands, local beacons, which should be 10W ERP max, may preferably be placed in the
x.750-x.800MHz range of the relevant narrowband segment, adjacent to, but outside of the exclusive
propagation beacon segments. In this range, the lower powers will permit greater frequency reuse. This
permits traditional propagation beacon frequencies to be used more efficiently and minimise cases of
local/mutual interference. National societies should inform the IARU R1 Beacon coordinator of such local
beacons and national bandplan use.

Transmission mode
Amplitude or Frequency shift keying (A1A or F1A) may be used according to the scheme described in
PART 3 Section 11. The beacon radiates on its nominal frequency during the period where no information
is transmitted. It then moves to "space", 250/400Hz below and then keys back to nominal (“mark") while
transmitting its information. In this way the transmission sounds like A1A in a SSB receiver set to receive
USB.

Frequency spacing
All coordinated and notified beacons should operate within the beacon segment of the band plan and be
on a frequency which is in accordance to the table below. In bands above 1.3GHz, half the frequency
spacing defined below be used as an offset in frequency coordination disputes (Vienna 2007).

VHF Handbook 9.00 37/180


IARU-R1
2,4 to 24 to
Band 50 MHz 70 MHz 145 MHz 435 MHz 1.3 GHz
10GHz 47 GHz

Frequency ppm 4 2.8 1.4 1.0 0.8 TBA TBA


Tolerance Hz
200 200 200 400 1000

Spacing 1 1 1 1 2-3kHz 5kHz 10kHz


between
beacons - kHz

F1A Frequency 250 250 400 400 400 400 400


shift - Hz

Frequency at nominal nominal nominal nominal nominal nominal nominal


“space” - Hz - 250
- 250 - 400 - 400 - 400 -400 -400

TBA = To Be Agreed at a future conference

Transatlantic beacon project


At the IARU Region 1 Conference in Tel Aviv 1996 a proposal from URE for a coordinated project whereby
beacons at the (North-)West-coast of European countries would be installed in order to test the
possibilities of 145 MHz propagation over the Atlantic Ocean, resulted in a recommendation, unanimously
accepted by the Conference :
To help investigate VHF transatlantic propagation, Member Societies are encouraged to participate
in an IARU Region 1 co-ordinated programme to establish "Conjugate Beacons" in the 145 MHz band.
(These would be similar to the conjugate beacons in the HF bands, emitting sequential signals which
are repeated.)

To help manage this project, a co-ordinator is required.


The tasks of this Beacon Project Co-ordinator will be:
• To make contact with the IARU Region 1 and Region 2 VHF/UHF Beacon Co-ordinators and to
make contact with societies/amateurs in Region 1 and Region 2 who are interested in participating
in this programme.
• To consult with technical experts with the aim of establishing the technical specifications of the
beacons.
• To liaise and co-ordinate between groups building beacons and also those build listening
equipment.
• To collect the results of the experiments and to report them to IARU Region 1.
This action of IARU Region 1 should be communicated to IARU Region 2 with the request that they
consider similar action.

VHF Handbook 9.00 38/180


IARU-R1
Synchronised 50 MHz Beacon Project (Varna 2014)
Introduction
The 2011 IARU Region-1 General Conference in Sun City agreed to a new Synchronised Beacon Project
(SBP) as part of its revisions to the 50MHz band plan. This required the existing beacons to migrate by
August 2014 to 50.4-50.5 MHz in order to leave space for the new system at the bottom of the 50MHz
band. As agreed at the Vienna Interim meeting in 2013, the basic parameters for beacons in the SBP are
1kHz frequency spacing, 1 minute CW/MGM and a 4 minute repeat period.

At the 2014 IARU Region-1 General Conference in Varna 2014, the migration of Region-1 50 MHz
beacons was reviewed and noted as progressing (with good propagation reports), but not yet achieved
completely. The deadline for migration of the remainder was extended to 31 December 2015, noting that
the default for QSY is usually +400 kHz unless a specific request is sent to the IARU Region 1 beacon
coordinator.
Furthermore it was also agreed that:
• The coordination of new beacons below 50,4 MHz shall no longer be possible, except for the
members of the Synchronised Beacon Project (SBP)
• The Synchronised beacons will now use – ‘once every 5 minute’ slots, instead of ‘once every 4
minutes’
Member Societies are invited to participate in the pilot programme for the SBP. The paper VA14_C5_14
will be used as an implementation guide and an initial pilot scheme demonstration. The societies are
invited to consider the best locations for SBP (e.g. an existing site or new strategic site). Region 2 and
Region 3 will be informed of progress should they wish to start implementing their own beacon multiplexes.

50 MHz synchronised not transmitting in their timeslot


Landshut 2017
50 MHz Synchronised beacons may optionally also transmit on 50.4xx when not transmit-ting in their
50.0xx synchronised scheme time slot.
• If they use this dual-frequency option, the beacon callsign on each frequency should be slightly
different to assist reception and reporting systems. For example, to append /S and /B onto the
callsign to indicate Synchronised and ordinary Beacon frequency respectively
• Synchronised Beacons should detect loss/failure of GPS and mute transmissions on their
synchronised frequency assignment (50.0xx). However, they remain free to transmit on their
(optional) 50.4xx assignment (where they may revert to a CW-only to indicate the problem)
• Consider the advantages of adaptive MGM and remote control for propagation events
• 50 MHz users and propagation experts are encouraged to propose multiplex sequences, with due
consideration for access to remote beacon locations/re-programming
• Both transmit and receive software should be flexible to support the above including for example
the use of more than one-time slot, if a multiplex is sparse during roll out

VHF Handbook 9.00 39/180


IARU-R1
IARU-R1 CERTIFICATES AND MEDALS
IARU Region 1 can recognize meritorious performance in the wide field of amateur activities by awarding
• an IARU Region I certificate
• an IARU Region I medal.

With respect to the amateur activities on the VHF/UHF/SHF bands the following recommendations are
relevant.
At the IARU Region 1 Conference in Folkestone (1961) the following resolution was adopted:
It is recommended that the Executive Committee of IARU Region I issue a certificate to those
amateurs within Region I who make first QSO's by unusual modes of propagation, such as
meteor-scatter, sporadic-E and moonbounce.

At the IARU Region 1 Conference in Malmo (1963) the following additional recommendation was
adopted(2):
The Chairman of the VHF/UHF/Microwave Committee is authorized to request the IARU Region 1
Executive Committee to issue Region 1 certificates for special VHF/UHF/SHF performances.

DB6NT
At the interim meeting of the IARU Region 1 VHF/UHF/Microwaves committee in Vienna 1995 it was
decided to propose to the Executive Committee to issue the Region 1 Medal to Michael Kuhne, DB6NT:
for his outstanding contributions to the promotion of microwave activities. He not only is a keen
microwave dx-er on all bands up to 245 GHz but has published his designs, allowing other
amateurs to construct microwave equipment.
The executive Committee supported this proposal and the Medal and Certificate were presented to DB6NT
by PA0EZ at the 1995 Friedrichshaven International Meeting

S53MV
The Executive Committee of IARU Region 1 has at its April 1999 Meeting decided to offer the IARU
Region 1 Medal to Matjaz Vidmar, S53MV:
in recognition of his contributions to amateur radio in the field of satellites, microwaves and digital
communications.
The medal and certificate were presented by PA0EZ to representatives of the Slovenian Society at an
official ceremony at the Region 1 Conference in Lillehammer 1999.

2
Wording brought in accordance with the IARU Region 1 Constitution adopted at the IARU Region 1 Conference in Noordwijkerhout (1987).

VHF Handbook 9.00 40/180


IARU-R1
National VHF/UHF/µWaves awards and certificates
A large number of awards and certificates are issued by the member societies in the various countries in
Region I, inter alia for achievements on the VHF/UHF/Microwaves bands. The official opinion of IARU
Region 1 is that it would be best to have a restricted number of worthwhile awards/certificates, as can be
judged from the following adopted recommendations:
The increasing number of awards and contests in Region I is viewed with deep concern and it is
recommended that member societies limit the number of such awards and contests in the best interests of
amateur radio. (Bad Godesberg, 1958)

The number of awards and certificates, at present in circulation, is not in the best interests of amateur
radio. It is recommended to place the matter before the IARU with a view to the preparation of a list of
awards in good standing which could bear the official approval of the IARU. (IARU Region 1 Conference in
Folkestone, 1961)

In order to enable VHF Managers/VHF Committees to inform the active VHF/UHF/Microwaves amateurs in
their countries on the available awards and certificates, the following recommendation(3) was adopted at
the IARU Region 1 Conference in Malmö (1963):
All VHF/UHF/Microwaves Managers are requested to send a list of the VHF/UHF/Microwaves certificates
available in their country, with all relevant data, to the Chairman of the VHF/UHF/Microwaves Committee,
in order to enable him to issue a complete list.

Note
In view of the two first recommendations set out on this page, it should be self-explanatory that some
screening has to be applied, and that only worthwhile certificates/awards, as e.g. issued by member
societies, should be listed.

In order to make it easier for amateurs to apply for a certificate or award, at the IARU Region 1 Conference
in Malmö (1963) the following recommendation was adopted:
Bearing in mind the difficulty and expense of sending QSL cards with applications for certificates it
is recommended that all member societies of IARU Region shall issue certificates on the
production of a declaration signed by the Traffic Manager or QSL Manager of the member society
in the residence country of the applying amateur.

In view of some questions that arose with the counting for "Number of Countries Worked" certificates, at
the IARU Region 1 Conference in Brussels (1969) the following recommendation was adopted:
VHF/UHF/Microwaves Certificates: For the issue of certificates concerning countries worked the
ARRL DXCC list of countries shall be used.

3
Wording brought in accordance with the IARU Region 1 Constitution adopted at the IARU Region 1 Conference in Noordwijkerhout (1987)

VHF Handbook 9.00 41/180


IARU-R1

PART 2
BANDPLANNING

VHF Handbook 9.00 42/180


IARU-R1
IARU REGION 1 BANDPLANS
Introduction
General
On the following pages are the official IARU Region 1 band plans currently valid for the 50 MHz, 70 MHz,
145 MHz, 435 MHz and the microwave bands are set out.
In accordance with the policy outlined in PART 3 section 1 only carefully considered modifications and/or
additions have been made during the tri annual IARU Region 1 Conferences.

VHF Managers should give maximum publicity to the adopted band plans. In view of the many newcomers,
regular repetition of the publication of the band plans is advisable.
Member Societies, and particularly their VHF Managers or VHF Committees, should strongly promote
adherence to the adopted band plans by all VHF/UHF/Microwaves amateurs in their country.

The following notes are referring to the Usage column in the band plan. Operators should take notice of
these agreements which are made for operating convenience, but no right to reserved frequencies can be
derived from a mention in the Usage column or from the following notes.
The users should be aware that this those band plans are generic for all members states of IARU-R1.
They can be more detailed in some Member states due to practical reasons end/or legislation. Therefore
we advise to look also to the bandplanning of the country of the operator.

European table of frequency allocations

In order to develop European common positions and proposals to harmonise within Europe the efficient
use of the radio spectrum, CEPT endorsed in 2002 the principle of adopting a harmonised European Table
of Frequency Allocations and Applications (also called the ECA table) to establish a strategic framework
for the utilisation of the radio spectrum in Europe.
You will find this Table on: https://www.ecodocdb.dk/download/2ca5fcbd-4090/ERCREP025.pdf
This table contains different footnotes, numbered as ECAxx

Some of them are important for us (see the footnotes in the bandplanning).
We give here a summary of the most important ones:........
Some of them are important for us( see the footnotes in the bandplanning).
We give here a summary of the most important ones:
• ECA9 - CEPT administrations may authorise all or parts of the band 69.9-70.5 MHz to the amateur
service on a secondary basis
• ECA17 - In the sub-bands 5755-5765 MHz, 10.36-10.37 GHz, 10.45-10.46 GHz the amateur
service operates on a secondary basis. In making assignments to other services, CEPT
administrations are requested wherever possible to maintain these subbands in such a way as to
facilitate the reception of amateur emissions with minimal power flux densities.
• ECA23 - In the sub-bands 5660-5670 MHz (earth to space), 5830-5850 MHz (space to earth) and
10.45-10.50 GHz the amateur-satellite additionally operates on a secondary and non interference
basis to other services. In making assignments to other services, CEPT administrations are
requested wherever possible to maintain these allocations in such a way as to facilitate the
reception of amateur emissions with minimal power flux densities.
• ECA35 - In Europe the band 75.5-76 GHz is also allocated to the Amateur and Amateur Satellite
services.

More info can also be found on the website European Communications Office

VHF Handbook 9.00 43/180


IARU-R1
50 – 54 MHz Band plan
Frequency Maximum Mode (a) Usage
Bandwidth

50.000
50.000 - 010 Region-1 *
50.010 - 020 Region-2 *
50.020 - 030 Region-3 *
Telegraphy exclusive
500 Hz * Reserved for Synchronised Beacon Project
(except Beacon Project)
50.050 CW future International centre of activity
50.090 CW Intercontinental centre of activity
50.100
50.100
International preferred
50.100 - 130 Intercontinental section
50.110 Intercontinental centre of activity (a)
2700 Hz SSB
Telegraphy
50.130 - 200 international section
50.150 International centre of activity
50.200
50.200
General usage
2700 Hz SSB 50.285 for crossband
Telegraphy
50.300
50.300
50.305 PSK Centre of activity
MGM
2700 Hz
Narrowband 50.310 - 320 EME centre of activity
Telegraphy 50.320 - 380 MS centre of activity
50.400
50.400
MGM Beacons exclusive
1000 Hz
Telegraphy
50.500
50.500 50.540 - 580 Simplex FM/DV Internet Voice Gateways
- All Modes
50.600-50.700 Digital communications (e); including
50.700 50.630 DV calling
50.700
12kHz FM / Digital voice 50.710 - 50.890 FM/DV repeater output channels
50.900

50.900
For wideband digital experiments – See Note (e)
- All modes
51.200
51.200
12kHz FM / Digital voice 51.210 - 390 FM/DV Repeater Input channels
51.400
51.400
51.410 - 590 FM/DV Simplex

51.510 FM calling frequency


- All Modes
51.810 – 990 FM/DV repeaters output channels

For wideband digital experiments – See Note (e)


52.000
52.000
500 kHz All modes (f)
54.000

VHF Handbook 9.00 44/180


IARU-R1
Notes: bandplan
• Legacy usage for MGM below 50.300 is accepted, but effort should be made to move this to 50.300 –
50.400 MHz. Usage by operators may vary due to restrictions on national allocations
• DV = Digital Voice

Footnotes:
a. The intercontinental DX calling frequency 50.110 MHz should not be used for calling within the
European part of Region 1 at any time.
b. deleted
c. deleted
d. Embedded data traffic is allowed along with Digital Voice. DV users should check that the channel
is not in use by other modes
e. Experiments using wider bandwidth digital modes may take place in the 50 MHz band within the
50.5 - 52 MHz segment where local conditions permit, on a shared basis that does not cause
interference to other users (including narrowband/beacon use and repeater inputs)
• Options for this include around 50.6, 51.0 or 51.7 MHz
• Recommended maximum bandwidths for such usage are:-
 50kHz in the 50.5-50.7 segment
 200kHz in the 50.9-50.2 segment
 500kHz in the 51.4-52.0 MHz segment
 See also wideband experimentation usage notes below
f. In those Region 1 countries where 52 - 54 MHz (or parts thereof) is allocated, its use should be
planned on the basis of up to 4 x 500 kHz blocks which may be sub-divided to suit digital
applications.
g. Amateurs using digital transmission methods must also ensure that their transmissions do not
spread beyond band/segment edges.

Usage Notes

a) FM: for technical specifications of FM telephony and channel numbering, refer to the relevant parts
of this Handbook.

b) Repeaters
In those Region 1 countries where it is allowed to set up repeaters on 50 MHz, the indicated channels
are recommended in order to establish a commonality. Provision is made in the band plan for two
options based on a common set of input channels:-

i) Outputs at 500kHz below the input frequencies (Nov Sad 2020)


ii) Outputs at 600kHz above the input frequencies (Tel Aviv 1996)

The more recent recommended use of the lower output (-500kHz) option for voice repeaters, avoids
the overlap near 51.9 MHz with experimental and other emerging wideband applications. The lower
output frequencies may also be easier for obtaining regulatory permissions. As per IARU-R1
recommendations, CTCSS should be used for FM Repeaters and Gateways.

c) Wideband Experimentation
• Spectral re-growth can be a major issue when operating digital modes. Close attention should
be given to amplifier linearity to control the final transmitted bandwidth and avoid such regrowth
affecting adjacent users.
• Member Societies should encourage such 50 MHz digital experiments to support innovation
and development of the band; and report results back to IARU Region 1

VHF Handbook 9.00 45/180


IARU-R1

70.0 – 70.5 MHz Band plan


The 70MHz band is increasingly recognised as being appropriate for amateur allocations. In the CEPT
area this progress is now recognised in the European Table of Frequency Allocations by Footnote ECA9
which states:
ECA9:CEPT administrations may authorise all or parts of the band 69.9-70.5 MHz to the amateur service on a
secondary basis
In addition it is worth noting that there is some experimental access on a national basis in the range 69.90
- 70.0MHz in cases where 70MHz is not available.
References:
[1] European Allocation Table: http://www.erodocdb.dk/Docs/doc98/official/pdf/ercrep025.pdf
[2] http://www.70MHz.org has a useful list of current allocations and permits

Frequency Maximum MODE Usage


(MHz) Bandwidth
70.000
TELEGRAPHY Coordinated Beacons(a)
1000Hz MGM
70.090
70.090
temporary and personal beacons
1000Hz BEACONS
70.100
70.100
TELEGRAPHY 70.185 Crossband centre of activity
2700Hz SSB 70.200 Centre of activity Telegraphy/SSB
MGM 70.250 Centre of activity MS
70.250
70.250
70.260 AM/FM calling
12kHz AM / FM (b) 70.270 MGM centre of activity

70.294
70.294
70.3125 Digital communications
70.3250 Digital communications

12kHz FM CHANNELS,
12.5 kHz spacing 70.4500 FM calling
70.4625
70.4750
70.500 70.4875 Digital communications

Notes: BANDPLAN
Footnotes:
a. Refer to Beacons Chapter for coordination of beacons (PART 1 Section 5)
b. Usage by operators may vary due to restrictions on national allocations
Notes: Usage
Footnotes: none

VHF Handbook 9.00 46/180


IARU-R1
144 – 146 MHz Bandplan

Frequency Maximum MODE USAGE


(MHz) Bandwidth
14 2
144.000
Satellites (downlinks only) (s)
2700 Hz ALL MODE (Varna 2014)

144.025
144.025

500 Hz 144.050 Centre of activity


Telegraphy (a)
144.100 Random MS(m)
144.100
144.100
Telegraphy 144.110–144.160 CW and MGM EME (i)
500 Hz & MGM

144.150
144.150
2700 Hz Telegraphy & SSB 144.300 SSB Centre of activity
144.400 & MGM
144.400
500 Hz Telegraphy Beacons exclusive (b)
MGM

144.490
144.491
500 Hz Personal weak signal
Experimental MGM
MGM Beacons
144.493
144.500 144.500 Image mode centre (SSTV, Fax,..)
144.600 Data centre of activity(MGM,RTTY,..)
144.750 ATV talk back
20 kHz All mode (f)

144.794
144.794
144.800 APRS

MGM (h) 144.8125 DV Internet voice gateway


12 KHz 144.8250 DV Internet voice gateway
Digital Communications 144.8375 DV Internet voice gateway
144.8500 DV Internet voice gateway
144.8625 DV Internet voice gateway
144.9625

VHF Handbook 9.00 47/180


IARU-R1
144.975
12kHz FM / Digital voice Repeater Input exclusive (c)
145.194

145194
12kHz FM / Digital voice (i) Space communication (p)
145.206
145.206 145.2375 FM Internet Voice Gateway
12kHz FM / Digital voice (i) 145.2875 FM Internet Voice Gateway
145.3375 FM Internet Voice Gateway

145.375 digital voice calling


145.500 FM calling
145.5625
145,5750
12kHz FM / Digital voice Repeater Output exclusive (c, d)
145.7935
145.794
12kHz FM / Digital voice (i) Space communication (p)
145.806
145.806
12kHz ALL MODE (e) Satellite exclusive
146.000

Notes: BANDPLAN
The following notes are part of the officially adopted IARU Region 1 bandplan, and all member societies
should strongly promote adherence to the recommendations made in these notes.
General:
i. In Europe no input or output channels of telephony repeaters shall be allowed to operate between
144.000 and 144.794 MHz.
Footnotes:
a. Telegraphy is permitted over the whole band, except in the beacon band; Telegraphy exclusive
between 144.000 - 144.110 MHz. (except satellite output downlink to earth)
b. Refer to Beacons Chapter for coordination of beacons in the beacon sub-band
Section-
c. For technical standards on FM and repeaters PART 3 section 8.2
If there is a real need for more repeater channels it is recommended that Societies or Repeater
Groups consider setting up a repeater system on the higher frequency band(s).
Further to this subject the following recommendation was adopted in. De Haan, 1993:
For the numbering of FM telephony channels, see annex 2 to this section.
d. Established simplex frequencies on repeater output channels may be retained.

e. In view of the important public relations aspect of amateur satellite activities, it was decided at the
IARU Region 1 Conference in Miskolc Tapolca (1978) that:
i. AMSAT will be allowed to use the band 145.8 - 146.0 MHz for amateur satellite activity.
ii. This decision was re-confirmed at the IARU Region 1 Conference in Brighton (1981).
iii. see also footnote p
f. No unmanned stations shall use the all-mode segment, except for linear transponders and ARDF
beacons. (Tel Aviv 1996, San Marino 2002)
i. This segment is for simplex use only with no Digital Voice gateways. Embedded data traffic is
allowed along with digital voice. Digital Voice users should check that the channel is not in use by
FM.
j. Amateur Satellite Linear Transponder down-links. Subject to agreement with Region-2 and 3

VHF Handbook 9.00 48/180


IARU-R1
Notes: Usage
The following notes are referring to the Usage column in the bandplan. As already set out in the
introduction to section IIc, in the right amateur spirit operators should take notice of these agreements
which are made for operating convenience, but no right to reserved frequencies can be derived from a
mention in the Usage column or from the following notes.
Footnotes:
k. Not used
l. Not used
m. Deleted (VGC 2020)
n. Deleted (Varna 2014)
o. Not used
p. For FM voice communications with special stations like manned spacecraft it is recommended to
use 145.200 MHz for simplex operation or 145.200/145.800 MHz for split-channel operation
(Vienna 1995/Tel Aviv 1996).
q. It is recognised that in the IARU Region 1 rules for the Championships in Amateur Radio Direction
Finding (ARDF) competitions, the frequencies for the unmanned beacons are in the segment
144.500 – 144.900 MHz. These beacons run low power and are on the air only during ARDF
events. (Davos 2005)
r. No transmission shall be made below 144,0025 MHz* (Varna 2014)
*so that a necessary guard band is provided at the bottom edge
National usage notes
Some countries have existing use at:
• • 144.660-144.690 Linear Transponder Inputs
• • 144.630-144.660 Linear Transponder Outputs

VHF Handbook 9.00 49/180


IARU-R1
430 – 440 MHz
Frequency Maximum MODE USAGE
MHz Bandwidth
430.000 FM repeater
430.025 - output-channel freqs
430.375 (F/PA/ON),12,5 kHz spacing,
1.6 MHz shift (f)

430.400 - Digital communication link


430.575 channels (g) (j)
SUB-REGIONAL
(national 430.600 - Digital communications repeater channels
bandplanning) ALL 430.925 (g) (j) (l)
(d) MODES
430.925 - Multi mode channels (j) (k) (l)
431.025

431.050 - Repeater Input Region 1, 12.5 kHz spacing,


431.9875 7.6 MHz shift (f).

Repeater input channel freqs


431.975 431.625 - (F/PA/ON), 12.5 kHz spacing,
431.975 1.6 MHz shift (p)

432.000
432.050 Telegraphy centre of activity
500Hz Telegraphy (a)
MGM 432.088 PSK31 centre of activity
432.100
432.100 432.200 SSB centre of activity
Telegraphy
2700Hz SSB 432.350 Microwave talkback centre of activity
MGM
432.400 432.370 Meteor scatter centre of activity
432.400 Telegraphy,
500Hz MGM Beacons exclusive (b)
432.490
432.491
500 Hz EMGM Experimental MGM
432.493
432.500 432.500 NEW APRS FREQUENCY

432.600 – REPEATER INPUT REGION 1


12kHz ALL 432.9875 25 kHz spacing, 2 MHz shift
MODES

In the UK repeater OUTPUT channels.

432.975

VHF Handbook 9.00 50/180


IARU-R1
433.000
12 kHz FM 433.000 – Repeater Input Region 1, 12.5 kHz spacing,
Digital voice 433.3875 1.6 MHz shift (p).
Repeater (p)
433.375 433.000 – Repeater Output only in the UK, 25 kHz
433.375 spacing, 1.6 MHz shift.

433.400 433.400 SSTV(FM/AFSK)


433.450 digital voice calling
FM 433.500 FM calling
12 kHz Digital voice
(f) (o) SIMPLEX CHANNELS, 25 kHz spacing,
433.575 ( Channel freq 433.400 -- 433.575 MHz)
433.600

433.625 - Digital communications channels (g) (h) (i)


ALL 433.775
MODES
434.000 Centre frequency of digital experiments as
defined on note (m)

LORA (p)
434.000
434.000 ALL MODES 434.450 - Digital communications channels
12kHz (c) ATV (c) 434.575 (by exception !! ) (i) (m)
434.594
434.594
434.600 - Repeater Output Region 1, 12.5 kHz
12kHz (c) ALL 434.9875 spacing, 1.6 or 2.0 MHz shift (p)
MODES
434.600 – Repeater Input only in the UK, 25 kHz
434.981 434.975 spacing, 1.6 MHz shift.

435.000
Satellite service

436.000
436.000 Satellite Service
and 437.000 DATV/Data centre of activity
438.000 DATV/Data(c)
438.000
438.025 - Digital communications channel
438.175 frequency (g)

438.200 -
438.525 Digital communications repeater
channels (g) (j) (l)
ALL MODES 438.550 -
438.625 Multi-mode (j) (k) (l)

438.650 - Repeater Output Region 1, 12.5 kHz


439.5875 spacing, 7.6 MHz shift (f).

439.800 --
439.975 Digital communications link channels
440.000 (g) (j)

VHF Handbook 9.00 51/180


IARU-R1
Notes: BANDPLAN
The following notes are part of the officially adopted IARU Region 1 bandplan, and all member societies
should strongly promote adherence to the recommendations made in these notes.
a) In Europe no input or output channels of telephony repeaters shall be allowed to operate between
432 and 433 MHz ( From 1-1-2004 those frequencies are between 432.000 and 432.600 MHz )
b) FM telephony channels and Repeaters are specified in chapter 8.2.1
c) ATV Repeater outputs are not permitted in the 435MHz band (Varna 2014)

Footnotes
a. Refer to Beacons Chapter for coordination of beacons in the beacon sub-band
See Section 5.1.1
• As of 1-Jan-2021 Analogue ATV and SATV is no longer permitted in the 430-440 MHz band. ATV
operators are encouraged to use the microwave allocations where available, but may use narrower
bandwidth DATV modes in the 436-438 MHz band. See 1.5.4 for further guidance for DATV and
experimental Data usage. In case of interference between DATV/Data and the Amateur Satellite
Service, the Satellite Service shall have priority.(VGC2020)
The words "Sub-regional (national) bandplanning" appearing in IARU Region 1
VHF/UHF/Microwave bandplans mean the following:
In bands and sub-bands not available throughout Region 1, band-planning should be coordinated on a
sub-regional basis between the countries where those bands and sub-bands are allocated to the Amateur
Service. The words "national bandplanning" refer to bands/segments which are available only in a single
country (such as the 70 MHz band allocation), or only in a few widely separated countries.(Torremolinos
1990)
b. Not used
Embedded data traffic is allowed along with digital voice. Digital Voice users should check that the
channel is not in use by other modes
Notes: Usage
The following notes are referring to the Usage column in the bandplan. As already set out in the
introduction to section IIc, in the right amateur spirit operators should take notice of these agreements
which are made for operating convenience, but no right to reserved frequencies can be derived from a
mention in the Usage column or from the following notes ( except where ‘exclusive’ is mentioned).
Footnotes
f. The HB/DL/OE wide-shift repeater system, already in use for a long time, is valuable with a view to
a better utilisation of the whole band. Hence IARU Region 1 endorses the system.
This also applies for the French repeater channel system, also adopted by the Netherlands and
Belgium, which IARU Region 1 supports as a useful measure to fill a hitherto unused part of the
band.
g. In the Usage section of the 435 MHz bandplan the following frequency segments have been
designated for digital communications:
i. 430.544 - 430.931 MHz Extension of the 7.6 MHz repeater system input
for digital communication
438.194 - 438.531 MHz Output channels for the above
ii. 433.619 - 433.781 MHz
438.019 - 438.181 MHz
iii. 430.394 - 430.581 MHz For digital communication links
439.794 - 439.981 MHz For digital communication links
With due regard to the band allocated to the Amateur Service by the national Administration, the interests
of other users, possible interference from e.g. ISM, the specific digital technique or system to be
accommodated etc., a sub-regional, or national choice may be made within the above segments.
h. In those countries where 433.619 - 433.781 MHz is the only segment of the 435 MHz band available
for digital communications, modulation techniques requiring a channel separation exceeding 25 kHz
should not be used. If different or incompatible use of this part of the frequency spectrum in

VHF Handbook 9.00 52/180


IARU-R1
contemplated in neighbouring countries, this use should be coordinated between the countries
concerned with the aim of avoiding harmful interference.
i. On a temporary basis, in those countries where 433.619 - 433.781 MHz is the only segment of the
435 MHz band available for Digital Communications:
i. Channels with centre frequencies 432.500, 432.525, 432.550, 432.575, 434.450, 434.475,
434.500, 434.525, 434.550 and 434.575 may be used for digital communications.
ii. Use of these channels must not interfere with linear transponders.
iii. Modulation techniques requiring a channel separation exceeding 25 kHz must not be used
on these channels. (De Haan, 1993)
j. At the IARU Region 1 Conference in Torremolinos (1990) the following recommendation was
adopted regarding the segments for repeaters and links, shown in footnote g:
For a repeater/link to be installed within 150 km of a national border, the member society should
co-ordinate the frequency allocation and the technical (system) data with the member societies in
neighbouring countries. Special attention should be paid to the common good practice of using directional
antennas and the minimum power necessary.
As a matter of course this agreement is also valid for any link experiments carried out on the multi-mode
channels in the segment 438.544--438.631 MHz. (De Haan, 1993).
k. These multi-mode channels are to be used for experimenting with new transmission technologies
(De Haan, 1993)
l. In the United Kingdom the use of low-power speech repeaters on repeater channels in the segment
438.419--438.581 is allowed. Where necessary, frequencies will be coordinated with neighbouring
countries (De Haan, 1993).
m. Experiments using wide band digital modes may take place in the 435 MHz band by staying in the
segment.
n. Common frequencies for Simplex (FM) Internet voice gateways are:
433.950, 433.9625, 433.975, 433.9875, 434.0125, 434.025, 434.0375, 434.050 MHz
(Cavtat 2008)
o. All Voice repeater channels may use FM or Digital Voice modes. (Cavtat 2008)
p. 125kHz Max BW Data (such as LoRa etc)’ to enable experiments of other modes more easily.
(VGC2020)

National usage notes


q. Some countries have existing use at:
432.500-432.600 Linear Transponder Inputs
432.600-432.800 Linear Transponder Outputs
439.9875 POCSAG (Paging)
r. In countries without access to the full 70 cm band, the following 12,5 kHz repeater channels with a
1.6 MHz separation between uplink and downlink can be implemented:
a. Input Frequencies (uplink) 431,225 – 431,600 MHz
b. Output Frequencies (downlink) 432,825 – 433,200 MHz
This needs international coordination if necessary
1.5.4 DATV and Experimental Data usage in the 436-438 MHz Band (VGC 2020)
If the 436-438MHz amateur satellite section is used for DATV or other experimental Data developments, it
shall be on the following basis:
• DATV (like Voice) Repeater outputs are not permitted
• DATV Internet gateways are not permitted
• DATV Repeater inputs are permitted (eg for cross band usage)
• DATV Simplex usage is permitted
• Transmission times by DATV/Data users should be as short as possible
Any DATV and adhoc simplex Data usage of similar bandwidths to DATV, should be compliant with the
Region 1 Technical Recommendations for DATV in Section-9.4 and in particular the maximum bandwidth.
No other fixed infrastructure for nodes, gateways, DV hot-spots or repeaters are permitted in 436-438MHz.
VHF Handbook 9.00 53/180
IARU-R1

1200 – 1300 MHz Bandplan


Frequency Maximum MODE USAGE
MHz Bandwidth
1240.000
2700 Hz ALL MODE (reserved for future)
1240.500
1240.500
500Hz Telegraphy Beacons (reserved for future)
MGM
1240.750
1240.750
20kHz FM
Digital voice (reserved for future)
1241.000
1241.000 1240.000-1241.000 Digital communications
1242.025-1242.250 Repeater output, ch. RS1 - RS10
20kHz ALL MODE 1242.275-1242.700 Repeater output, ch. RS11 - RS28
1242.725-1243.250 Digital communications, ch. RS29 -
1243.250 RS50
1243.250
(d) ATV 1258.150-1259.350 Repeater output, ch. R20 - R68
Digital ATV
1260.000
1260.000
(d) Satellite
Service
1270.000
1270.000
1270.025-1270.700 Repeater input, ch. RS1 -- RS28
20kHz All Mode 1270.725-1271.250 Digital communication,
ch. RS29 -- RS50
1272.000
1272.000
(d) ATV
Digital ATV
1290.994
1290.994
FM RM0 (1291.000) -- RM19
20kHz Digital voice 25kHz spacing
Repeater RM19 (1291.475)
1291.481 INPUT
1291.494
ALL 1293.150-1294.350 Repeater input,
(d) MODES
R20 (1293.150)
1296.000 R68 (1294.350)

1296.000
500Hz Telegraphy 1296.00-1296.025 Moonbounce
MGM
1296.150

VHF Handbook 9.00 54/180


IARU-R1
1296.150 1296.200 Narrow-band centre of activity
Telegraphy
SSB 1296.400-1296.600 Linear transponder input
2700Hz MGM 1296.500 Image center (SSTV, Fax etc)
1296.600 Narrowband Data center
(MGM, RTTY,..)

1296.600-1296.700 Linear transponder output


1296.800 1296.741- 1296.743 experimental MGM (500Hz)
1296.750-1296.800 Local Beacon (10W ERP max)
1296.800
500Hz Telegraphy Beacons exclusive (b)
MGM
1296.994
1296.994
FM RM0 (1297.000)
20kHz Digital voice 25 KHz spacing
Repeater RM19 (1297.475)
1297.481 OUTPUT
1297.494 SM20 (1297.500)

(25 KHz spacing - SIMPLEX)


FM (c)
20kHz 1297.500 FM center of activity
Digital Voice 1297.725 Digital Voice calling
(e) (25 KHz spacing - SIMPLEX)
1297.900-1297.975 Simplex FM Internet voice gateways
1297.981 SM39 (1297.975)
1298.000 General mixed analogue or digital use in 25 kHz channels
20kHz All modes 1298.025MHz (RS1)
1298.975MHZ (RS39)
1299.000
1299.000 Arranged as 5 x150kHz channels for high speed Digital Data (DD)
150kHz All modes usage:
Centres: 1299.075, 1299.225, 1299.375, 1299.525, 1299.675 MHz
1299.750 (+/- 75kHz)
1299.750 8x25kHz channels (available for FM/DV use) :
20kHz All modes Centres: 1299.775-1299.975
1300.000

Notes: BANDPLAN
The following notes are part of the IARU Region 1 bandplan for this band, originally adopted during the
IARU Region 1 Conference at Noordwijkerhout (1987), and all member societies should strongly promote
adherence to the recommendations made in these notes.
At the IARU Region-1 Conference at Cavtat (2008), Recommendation CT08_C5_27 was adopted which
designated the 1240.0-1240.75MHz segment as an alternative narrowband section and makes a series of
recommendations for replanning other parts of the band for DATV and Digital Voice & Data

Footnotes
a. deleted
b. Refer to Beacons Chapter for coordination of beacons in the beacon sub-band
Section
c. In countries where 1298 - 1300 MHz is not allocated to the Amateur Service (e.g. Italy) the FM
simplex segment may also be used for digital communications.
d. Bandwidth limits according to national regulations.
e. Embedded data traffic is allowed along with digital voice. Digital Voice users should check that the
channel is not in use by other modes

VHF Handbook 9.00 55/180


IARU-R1
Notes: Usage
The following note refers to the Usage column in the bandplan. As already set out in the introduction to
section IIc, in the right amateur spirit operators should take notice of these agreements which are made for
operating convenience, but no right to reserved frequencies can be derived from a mention in the Usage
column.

During contests and band openings, local traffic using narrow-band modes should operate between
1296.500 - 1296.800 MHz.

VHF Handbook 9.00 56/180


IARU-R1
2300 – 2450 MHz Bandplan

Frequency Maximum Mode Usage


Bandwidth
2300.000
2304 - 2306 Narrow band segment in
SUB-REGIONAL countries where the 2320-2322 segment is not
(national) 20 kHz ALL MODES available
BANDPLANNING (a)
2308 - 2310 Narrow band segment
2320.000 in HB
2320.000
2320.000-2320.025 EME
All modes
2320.200 SSB centre of activity

2320.750-2320.800 Local Beacons


2320.800 (10W ERP max)
2320.800
Telegraphy BEACONS EXCLUSIVE (c)
2321.000 MGM
2321.000
FM and VOICE
20 kHz Digital Voice SIMPLEX & REPEATERS (b)
2322.000
2322.000
2322.000-2355.000 ATV
2355.000-2365.000 Digital
All Modes (b) communications
2365.000-2370.000 Repeaters
2370.000-2392.000 ATV
2400.000 2392.000-2400.000 Digital
communications
2400.000 2400 - 2402 Narrow band segment in
Amateur Satellite countries where the 2320-2322 segment is not
2450.000 Service available
2400.500 : centre of activity
2400,800 – 2401,000 Coordinated NB beacons

2427.00 - 2443.00 ATV if no satellite


uses this segment

Notes: BANDPLAN
a. The words "Sub-regional (national) bandplanning" appearing in IARU Region 1
VHF/UHF/Microwave bandplans mean the following:
In bands and sub-bands not available throughout Region 1, band-planning should be coordinated on a
sub-regional basis between the countries where those bands and sub-bands are allocated to the Amateur
Service. The words "national bandplanning" refer to bands which are available only in a single country
(such as the 70 MHz band allocation), or only in a few widely separated countries. (Torremolinos 1990)
b. In countries where the ALL MODES segment 2322 - 2400 MHz is not allocated to the Amateur
Service, the FM SIMPLEX & REPEATER segment 2321 - 2322 MHz may be used for digital data
transmissions. For the specification of FM see section VIb
c. In countries where the narrow-band segment 2320 - 2322 MHz is not available, the following
alternative narrow-band segments can be used:
• 2304 - 2306 MHz
• 2308 - 2310 MHz
• 2400 -2402 MHz

VHF Handbook 9.00 57/180


IARU-R1
3400 -3475 MHz

Maximum Mode Usage


Frequency Bandwidth
3400.000
3400.100 Centre of activity and EME (b)

ALL MODE
3400.800 3400.750-3400.800 Local Beacons (d)
3400.800
BEACONS ONLY (e)
ALL MODE
3400.995
3401.000
ALL MODE

3402.000
3402.000
ALL MODE SATELLITE DOWNLINKS (a) (c)

3410.000
3410.000
ALL MODE

3475.000

Notes: BANDPLAN
Footnotes:
a. CEPT footnote ECA17 no longer includes 3400-3410 MHz. However the CEPT ECA Table (ERC
Report 25) still includes amateur service as a secondary allocation in 3400-3410 MHz
b. EME Centre of Activity has migrated from 3456 to 3400.1MHz to promote harmonised usage and
activity
c. Amateur Satellite Service is allocated in 3400-3410MHz in Regions 2&3 and in some countries of
Region-1.
d. 3400.750-3400.800MHz may be designated for Local Beacon use (10W ERP max) by National
Societies.
e. Refer to Beacons Chapter for coordination of beacons in the beacon sub-band

VHF Handbook 9.00 58/180


IARU-R1
5650 – 5850 MHz Bandplan

Frequency Maximum Mode Usage


Bandwidth
5650.000
ALL MODES AMATEUR SATELLITE SERVICE ( up-link)
5668.000
5668.000

5668.200 Narrow band center of activity (a)


ALL MODES
AMATEUR SATELLITE SERVICE ( up-link)
5670.000
5670.000
MGM
5700.000
5700.000
ALL MODES
5760.000
5760.000
5760.200 Narrow band center of activity (a)
2700 Hz ALL MODES
5760.750-5760.800 Local Beacon (d)
5760.800
5760.800
Telegraphy BEACONS ONLY
MGM
5760.990
5761.000
ALL MODE
5762.000
5762.000
ALL MODES (d)
5830.000
5830.000
ALL MODES AMATEUR SATELLITE SERVICE (down-link)
5850.000

Notes: BANDPLAN
Footnotes
a. Societies are urged to inform their members that stations should preferably be able to operate in
both narrow-band segments.
b. 5760.750-5760.800MHz may be designated for Local Beacon use (10W ERP max) by National
Societies.
c. Refer to Beacons Chapter for coordination of beacons in the beacon sub-band
d. Any wideband system shall protect narrowband applications, which have priority

VHF Handbook 9.00 59/180


IARU-R1
10.000 – 10.500 GHz Bandplan

Frequency Maximum Mode Usage


GHz Bandwidth
10.000
MGM
10.150
10.150
ALL MODES
10.250
10.250
MGM
10.350
10.350
ALL MODES
10.368
10.368
10.3682 Narrow band center of activity
2700 Hz ALL MODES
10.368.800 10368.750-10368.800 Local Beacon (d)
10.368.800
10.368.990 BEACONS ONLY (c)

10.369
ALL MODES
10.370

10.370 ALL MODES


10.450

10.450 10.450-10.452 Narrow band modes in countries


ALL MODES where 10.368-10.370 is not available

AMATEUR SATELLITE SERVICE


10.500

Notes: BANDPLAN

Footnotes
a. In those countries where the narrow-band segment 10368 - 10370 MHz is not available, the
segment 10450 - 10452 MHz is suggested as an alternative narrow-bandwidth segment.
b. 10368.750-10368.800 may be designated for Local Beacon use (10W ERP max) by National
Societies.
c. Refer to Beacons Chapter for coordination of beacons in the beacon sub-band Section

VHF Handbook 9.00 60/180


IARU-R1
24.000 – 24250 GHz Bandplan

Frequency GHz Maximum Mode Usage


Bandwidth
24.000
24.025 Wideband centre of activity (Varna 2014)
ALL MODES
24.048
24.048
24.0482 Narrow band centre of activity

2700 Hz ALL MODES AMATEUR SATELLITE SERVICE


NARROW BAND MODES

24.048.800 24048.750-24048.800MHz Local Beacon (b)


24.048.800
ALL MODES BEACONS (c)
24.048.995
24.049 AMATEUR SATELLITE SERVICE
2700 Hz ALL MODES &
NARROW BAND MODES
24.050
24.050
ALL MODES

24.250

Notes: BANDPLAN
Footnotes
a. Deleted (Varna 2014)
b. 24048.750-24049.800MHz may be designated for Local Beacon use (10W ERP max) by National
Societies.
c. Refer to Beacons Chapter for coordination of beacons in the beacon sub-band

VHF Handbook 9.00 61/180


IARU-R1
47.000 – 47.200 GHz Bandplan

Frequency Maximum Mode Usage


Bandwidth
47.000

ALL MODES

47.088

47.088
47.088200 Narrow band center of activity

2700 Hz ALL MODES AMATEUR SATELLITE SERVICE

47.090

47.090

ALL MODES

47.200

VHF Handbook 9.00 62/180


IARU-R1
75.500 – 81.500 GHz Bandplan

Frequency Maximum Mode Usage


Bandwidth
75.500
AMATEUR SATELLITE SERVICE
(Preferred) (a)
2700 Hz All Mode

75976.200 MHz : Preferred Narrow band centre of activity


76.000
76.000
76032.200 MHz :Narrow Band Centre of activity in some
All Mode countries (not preferred) (b)

77.500

77.500
77500.200 MHz: Preferred NB centre of activity in countries
outside the CEPT area (non-preferred / preferred) (c)
2700 Hz All Mode
AMATEUR SATELLITE SERVICE
77.501

77.501

All Mode ALL MODES


(Preferred segment)
78.000

78.000
ALL MODES
(not preferred)
All Mode

81.500

Notes: BANDPLAN
Footnotes
a. Preferred in those CEPT countries having implemented ECA35.
b. Between 77.5 and 78 GHz the amateur and amateur satellite service have a primary/exclusive
status and between 75,5-76 GHz a primary status through ECA footnote ECA35 in CEPT
countries, while the status is secondary in the remainder of the allocation. The all mode section in
the secondary segment should only be used in case the preferred segment cannot be used
c. Preferred in those countries not having implemented ECA35

VHF Handbook 9.00 63/180


IARU-R1
122.250 – 123.000 GHz Bandplan

Frequency Maximum Mode Usage


Bandwidth
122.250

2700 Hz All Mode NARROW BAND MODES

122.251
122.251

All Mode

123.000

VHF Handbook 9.00 64/180


IARU-R1
134.000 – 141.000 GHz Bandplan

Frequency Maximum Mode Usage


Bandwidth
134.000

ALL MODES AMATEUR SATELLITE SERVICE

134.928
134.928

2700Hz ALL MODES 134.930 GHz Narrow band center of activity

134.930
134.930

ALL MODES

136.000
136.000

ALL MODES (not preferred) (a)

141.000

Notes: BANDPLAN
Footnotes
a) Between 134 and 136 GHz the amateur and amateur satellite service have a primary/exclusive
status, while the status is secondary in the remainder of the allocation.
The all mode section in the secondary segment should only be used in case the preferred segment
cannot be used

VHF Handbook 9.00 65/180


IARU-R1
241.000 – 250.000 GHz Bandplan

Frequency Maximum Mode Usage


Bandwidth
241.000

ALL MODES (not preferred) (a)

248.000
248.000
AMATEUR SATELLITE SERVICE
ALL MODES &
NARROW BAND MODES

248.001
248.001

ALL MODES (Preferred segment) (b)

250.000

Notes: BANDPLAN
Footnotes
a. The all mode section in the secondary segment should only be used in case the preferred segment
cannot be used
b. Between 248 and 250 GHz the amateur and amateur satellite service have a primary/exclusive
status, while the status is secondary in the remainder of the allocation

VHF Handbook 9.00 66/180


IARU-R1
Additional Band plans
These band plans are only in use in some countries who have access to those frequencies. They can
serve as an example for future use in other countries of Region 1.

Table 1 Irish 40–44 MHz (8 metre) Band Plan for Amateur Service

Frequency Maximum Mode (a) Usage


Bandwidth
40.000
Lower Beacon Band
1000 Hz Telegraphy MGM
40.013 (Ireland) planned 40.071 (Denmark)
and 40.050 (UK) operational.
40.100
40.100 40.150 CW centre of activity and CW calling
500 Hz Telegraphy frequency.
40.190 – 40.200 future intercontinental CW DX
40.200 sub-band
40.200 future CW and SSB intercontinental DX
40.200
calling frequency

40.200 – 40.230 future intercontinental SSB


2700 Hz Telegraphy SSB DX sub-band

40.250 SSB centre of activity and SSB calling


frequency.

40.285 SSB cross-band centre of activity


40.300
40.300
MGM 40.305 PSK Centre of activity
2700 Hz Narrowband 40.310 -40.320 future EME centre of activity
Telegraphy 40.320 -40.380 MS centre of activity
40.400

40.400 40.410 SSTV


20 kHz All Modes 40.440 -40.480 Simplex FM Internet Voice
Gateways
40.490-40.510 NOT TO BE USED
40.520-40.650 Digital Communications
40.600 DV calling

Note: Avoid 40.49-40.51 (3rd harmonic falls


40.660 close to 121.5 the aeronautical distress
frequency)

40.660 Upper Beacon Band (Subject to change)


1000 Hz Telegraphy MGM
40.661 – 40.674 Slovenia
40.675 – 40.679 South Africa

Applicable for countries where Amateur


40.680 Service allocation is limited to all or part of the
ISM band 40.66 – 40.70 MHz
40.680
SSB frequencies 40.681, 40.684, 40.687,
40.690, 40.693, 40.696
2700 Hz Telegraphy MGM SSB
SSB calling frequency 40.681 MHz (Subject to
change)

VHF Handbook 9.00 67/180


IARU-R1
40.700
Applicable for countries where Amateur
Service is limited to all or parts of the ISM band
40.66 – 40.70 MHz

40.710-40.890 FM/DV Repeater Inputs, 20


40.700 kHz spacing
1.1 MHz I/P-O/P
41.210 -41.390 FM/DV Repeater Inputs, 20
20 kHz All Modes kHz spacing (paired with 56.810 – 56. 990
15.6 MHz I/P-O/P)
41.410 -41.590 FM/DV Simplex
41.500 FM calling frequency
41.810 – 41.990 FM Repeater Outputs, 20 kHz
spacing (paired with 40.710-40.890 1.1 MHz
I/P-O/P spacing)
43.000 42.000-43.000 simplex 12.5 kHz spacing
42.500 FM calling frequency (12.5 kHz
channel)
43.000
Could be paired with 52 – 54 MHz and/or 54-
500 KHz All modes 56 MHz (subject to the outcome of WRC-19
and/or the CEPT ECA

45.000

VHF Handbook 9.00 68/180


IARU-R1
Table 2 Irish 54.0–69.9 MHz (5 metre) Band Plan for Amateur Service

Frequency Maximum Mode (a) Usage


Bandwidth
54.000
Could be paired with 43-45 MHz
500 kHz All modes
Note: R2 BC NTSC video carrier 55.25 MHz
56.000

56.010 – 56.090 1.8 MHz I/P-O/P FM/DV


56.000
repeaters input channels, (20 kHz spacing
paired with 57.810-57.890)
20 kHz All Modes 56.100 – 56.800 Digital communications
56.810 – 56.990 15.6 MHz I/P-O/P FM/DV
repeaters output channels, (20 kHz spacing
paired with 41.210-41.390)
57.810 – 57. 990 1.8 MHz I/P-O/P FM/DV
58.000
repeaters output channels, (20 kHz spacing
paired with 56.010-56.090)
58.000
58.000 – 58.475 FM/DV Simplex
58.500 FM calling frequency
58.540 – 58.580 Simplex FM Internet Voice
20kHz All Modes Gateways
58.610 SSTV
58.620-58.750 Digital communications
58.630 DV calling
59.500
Note: R2 BC NTSC colorburst 58.30 MHz
59.500
59.505 PSK Centre of activity

2700 Hz MGM 59.510 – 59.520 EME centre of activity


Narrowband 59.520 – 59.580 MS centre of activity
59.600 Telegraphy
59.600
SSB Telegraphy
2700 Hz General Use
59.685 for cross band
59.700
59.700
59.710 -59.750 International SSB DX window
59.710 International SSB calling and centre of
2700 Hz SSB Telegraphy activity
59.750 SSB National calling and centre of
59.800
activity
59.800
59.850 CW National calling and centre of
activity
500 Hz Telegraphy exclusive 59.870-59.890 International CW DX window
59.890 CW International calling and centre of
59.900 activity

59.900 Beacon Band


60.050 (UK) operational
1000 Hz MGM 60.013 (Ireland) planned
60.100 Telegraphy

60.100

8 MHz Experimental Broadband Centre Frequency 65.00

69.900

VHF Handbook 9.00 69/180


IARU-R1

MANAGING FREQUENCY ALLOCATIONS & BAND PLANNING

Introduction to VHF/UHF/µWaves bands and bandplans


Amateur and Amateur Satellite Service frequency allocations above 30 MHz
Current frequency allocations to the Amateur Service and the Amateur Satellite Service from 30 MHz
upwards, as established at the WARCs 1979 and maintained at the WARC 1991 (Torremolinos), 2000
(Istanbul) and 2003 (Geneva), are set out in section 2.2., which also gives some other useful information
extracted from the ITU Radio Regulations.

ITU Regulations strongly recommend that Radio Services use their frequency allocations rationally and
economically. With an eye to the retention of the frequencies allocated to the Amateur Service and the
Amateur Satellite Service it follows that full use should be made of all amateur bands, including the shared
bands (Recommendation adopted at the IARU Region I Conference in Stresa, 1956).

Particularly the use of the UHF/Microwaves bands should be encouraged by stressing UHF and
Microwaves technique in amateur magazines and by organising contests, meetings, conferences etc.
especially aimed at stimulating UHF and Microwaves activity (Recommendation adopted at the IARU
Conference in Brussels, 1969).

IARU-R1 Bandplanning: principles


At the meeting of the IARU Region 1 VHF/UHF/Microwaves Committee at Düsseldorf, April 1989, the
following principles of bandplanning were adopted. In the same month these principles were accepted as
(interim) Region 1 policy by the Executive Committee of IARU Region 1. They were definitely adopted at
the IARU Region 1 Conference in Torremolinos, 1 - 6 April 1990.

Basis
Many of the transmission modes and techniques currently used in the Amateur Service, such as ATV,
RTTY, FAX, repeaters, satellites etc. are not or not fully compatible. To make orderly communication on
and efficient use of the amateur bands possible, bandplanning is mandatory.

The basic philosophy behind bandplanning should be:


• to assign frequencies for certain activities in such a way that all current users can practice the
various modes of amateur radio with a minimum of mutual interference, provided they are using
state-of-the-art equipment and communication techniques.
Possibilities for shifts and/or extensions in the plan, which undoubtedly will become necessary in view of
future developments in techniques and communication modes should be carefully considered before
adopting a bandplan.
• to avoid, through careful planning, the necessity of drastic changes in future, as this type of
changes could lead to technical difficulties and/or large expenses for many amateurs (for
instance, a complete change in repeater channel frequencies).
• With good anticipation only gradual changes, adaptations and additions should be required in
the course of time.
All bandplanning should be in accordance with the I.T.U definitions of the Amateur Service and the
Amateur Satellite Service as found in the I.T.U. Radio Regulations:
• S1.56 Amateur Service: A radiocommunication service for the purpose of self-training,
intercommunication and technical investigations carried out by amateurs, that is, by duly
authorized persons interested in radio technique solely with a personal aim and without
pecuniary interest.

VHF Handbook 9.00 70/180


IARU-R1
• S1.57 Amateur Satellite Service: A radiocommunication service using space stations on
earth satellites for the same purposes as those of the Amateur Service

In accordance with the IARU principle of using Primary and Primary Exclusive allocations in preference to
secondary allocations, it is recommended that Amateur and Amateur Satellite weak-signal operation
should, wherever possible, use the 500 MHz segment 75.5 GHz to 76.0 GHz as per CEPT Footnote
ECA35 in the European Frequency Tables. Region 1 societies in CEPT countries should encourage their
administrations to implement ECA35 as soon as possible. The IARU bandplan should be amended
accordingly. (Davos 2005)
In the bands above 76 GHz, for example 241 GHz, users are encouraged to use the Primary Exclusive
(Davos 2005)

Remarks on the practical implementation


• The definition of the Amateur Service implies that bandplanning should take into account all
aspects of amateur radio – self-training, intercommunication and technical investigations.
• Consequently, for any band the bandplan should aim to accommodate for the maximum number of
amateur activities (modes, techniques), both now and in the future.
• Clearly there are impossible situations: CCIR ATV cannot be carried out in the 144 MHz allocation
etc.
• No band should, however, be allocated mainly to one aspect of amateur radio.
• When, due to its nature, an activity cannot be incorporated within the bandplan of a specific band, it
should not be forgotten that we have many bands available above 30 MHz. The more activity we
can generate on the higher bands the better for the defense of these bands against the claims of
other services!
• Technical investigations by amateurs, be it in the classical field of propagation research or on
modern digital communication techniques etc. are a laudable and legitimate aspect of amateur
activity.
• However, when using amateur bands for experimenting with communication techniques, the
transmitting techniques, the equipment and the frequencies used should never be taken as the
closing entry in the chain of development. Within a bandplan the use of optimum bandwidths,
transmitting equipment and techniques should be the normal aim for any amateur.
• Any required standardisation should also be aimed at the optimum use of amateur frequencies, and
be flexible enough to accommodate future improvements.
• In view of the large number of (potential) amateur users who will only practice communication,
the allocation of part of an amateur band to channelized work, be it FM repeaters or FM simplex,
Packet Radio, etc. can often be considered as practically final. Care should be exercised to
ensure that other aspects of amateur radio will find sufficient room and that room is available
for future developments in the Amateur Service.
• Techniques used in channelized amateur work should also be state-of-the art. For instance,
accommodating more channels should, where possible, be sought within the existing allocation by
using more modern techniques, smaller bandwidths etc. Other Radio Services have done this. In
the spirit of the definition of the Amateur Service there should be progress in techniques, not just a
claim for more spectrum, sticking to old techniques!
• FM repeaters provide a communication service to mobile amateur-stations (including hand-held
equipment). In some cases they may be installed to aid the accessibility of stations in
mountainous areas.
• They are not intended to make DX contacts possible, and hence their coverage under normal
propagation conditions should be limited.
• The number of repeater stations installed should be determined by the required regional coverage
the expected number of intended users

VHF Handbook 9.00 71/180


IARU-R1
• FM repeaters should not regularly be used as local chat channels for fixed (home) stations. This
interferes with their defined use.

Coordination process:
Repeater frequency allocations in neighbouring countries within Region-1 should be coordinated in case
their coverage pattern would overlap the border.
Coordination with the national society first.
For cross-border disputes to co-ordinate with the neighbouring societies relevant coordinators.
In the event of escalating to the national regulator that all the affected societies to be informed. This
should only be the last resort if steps one and two fail.

The primary purpose of beacons is the checking of propagation conditions, both for every day amateur use
and for special propagation research projects. When allocating exclusive segments of a band to beacons
regard should be given to:
Reasonable frequency separation is needed to allow for, for instance, auroral spread;
Guard bands at the edges of the segment are desirable to prevent de-sensitization of receivers used
for beacon projects due to strong local traffic on adjacent frequencies.

Some definitions
At the IARU Region 1 Conference 1996 (Tel Aviv) it appeared useful when amending bandplans to use the
following definitions:
An unmanned station is a station in the Amateur (Satellite) Service which transmits while the license
holder of the station is not present.
A network station is a station in the Amateur Service which has a permanent link to one or more
network stations.

VHF Handbook 9.00 72/180


IARU-R1
ITU and WRC Frequency Allocations Process

The top-level allocations for all radio services are determined by the ITU Radio Regulations. This includes
the amateur service and amateur satellite service. Following the 2012 World Radio Conference (WRC-12),
a copy can be found on the ITU website (www.itu.int ) at:-
http://www.itu.int/pub/R-REG-RR-2012
A WRC is held approximately every four years. Any changes to an allocation must be agreed by the
administrations of ~190 countries, many of which are grouped into Regional Telecommunications
Organisations (RTOs) as per the list below. IARU has only observer status at ITU. The WRC process
involves lengthy studies for each agenda item and numerous meetings at national and regional level in the
years leading up to a WRC. Each WRC also agrees the agenda items for the next WRC.

In order to defend existing amateur allocations or acquire new ones, Societies must wherever possible
engage with the spectrum managers in their National Regulatory Authority. In addition they need to build
working relationships with persons in other concerned organisations, where frequency bands are shared
with another primary and/or secondary user(s).

CEPT is an example of a RTO and is an association of 48 countries. This makes CEPT the largest RTO
and is an influential block of votes at ITU. Proposals for any current or future agenda items at WRC require
CEPT administrations to agree a European Common Proposal well in advance of a WRC. A result of the
increasing influence of RTOs and other regional bodies is that amateur matters require the early and
ongoing support of Societies to engage with their administrations (either in CEPT, or others such as the
African or Arab spectrum groups).

For example, at the 2014 Varna General Conference, an early IARU Region-1 proposal to CEPT for a
future WRC-18 agenda item for harmonised allocations at 1.8, 50 and 3400 MHz was discussed.
It was recommended that it be strongly supported by Member Societies, who in turn would need to
engage with their administrations. If successful this would be discussed and agreed as a future agenda
item at WRC-15 (along with 5MHz and other agenda items that affect amateur radio).

The Varna Conference and the IARU-AC also noted how the earlier start to the future-WRC preparation
process had changed in recent years, along with the growing pressures on amateur spectrum, and that
this would feed into Spectrum Strategy.

List of Regional Telecommunications Organisations (RTOs)

Region-1: Europe, Africa, Middle East, North Asia


CEPT - European Conference of Postal and Telecommunications Administrations
ATU - African Telecommunications Union
ASMG - Arab Spectrum Management Group
RCC - Regional Commonwealth in the field of communications (Russia et al)

Region-2: Americas
CITEL - Inter-American Telecommunication Commission

Region-3: Asia-Pacific
APT - Asia Pacific Telecommunity
Channel designation system for VHF/UHF FM channels

VHF Handbook 9.00 73/180


IARU-R1
Channel designation system for VHF/UHF FM channels

Although the FM channels can be referenced by their centre frequency, a numbering/naming system for
FM channels in the 50 MHz, 145 MHz and 435 MHz is recommended (Tel Aviv 1996)
Note: For the microwave bands the "old" numbering system as indicated in the bandplan still is
recommended.

Principle
The system is based upon the following principles:
• For each band, there should be a "designator letter":
1. 51 MHz : F
2. 145 MHz : V
3. 435 MHz : U
• Each designator letter should be followed by two (for 50 and 145 MHz) or three (for 435 MHz)
digits which indicate the channel.
• If a channel is used as a repeater output, its designator should be preceded by the letter "R".
• In the 50 MHz band the channel numbers start at F00 for 51.000 MHz and increment by one for
each 10 kHz.
• In the 145 MHz band the channel numbers start at V00 for 145.000 MHz and increment by one
for each 12.5 kHz.
• In the 435 MHz band the channel numbers start at U000 for 430 MHz and increment by one
for each 12.5 kHz.

Examples
F51 Simplex frequency 51.510 MHz
RF79 Repeater with output frequency 51.790 MHz
V40 Simplex frequency 145.500 MHz (the old S20)
RV48 Repeater with output frequency 145.600 MHz (the old R0)
U280 Simplex frequency 433.500 MHz (the old SU20)
RU002 Repeater with output frequency 430.025 MHz (the old FRU1)
RU242 Repeater with output frequency 433.025 MHz (the old RB1)
RU368 Repeater with output frequency 434.600 MHz (the old RU0)
RU692 Repeater with output frequency 438.650 MHz (the old R70)µ

Notes:
• In the 50 MHz band no FM channels are defined below 51 MHz. (See also footnote e to the 50
MHz bandplan.
• In the 145 MHz band FM channels only exist for the segment with the channel frequencies
145.000 -- 145.800 MHz (the latter channel may be used for a downlink by manned space
stations)
• In the 435 MHz band no FM channels are defined in the segment 432.000 MHz - 433.000 MHz

VHF Handbook 9.00 74/180


IARU-R1

PART 3
CONTESTING

VHF Handbook 9.00 75/180


IARU-R1
RULES IARU R1 50/70 MHZ, 145 MHZ AND UHF/µW CONTESTS
New rules for 2021

Objective
The main objectives are to make as many contacts as possible and to have fun. Other objectives may
include improving your operating skills, testing new equipment configurations and techniques, expanding
your horizons by operating on the microwave bands and exploring radio propagation.

Definitions
• Station: set of antennas, transmitters and receivers used during the contest on each frequency band
(i.e. multiband setups are composed of multiple stations).
• Location: geographical area with diameter of no more than 500 meters where the station resides
during the contest.
• Call Sign: identification of the station during the contest. Added prefix and/or suffix do not generate
different call sign (i.e. S50AAA/p or DL/S50AAA are the same call sign as S50AAA).
• Operator: an individual that operates the station during the contest using the station’s call sign.
Operator may reside inside (local operator) or outside (remote operator) the location. During the
contest an operator may operate only stations that form one entry.
• Entries:
o MULTI operator: stations from the same location, operated by more than one operator and
using one callsign on all bands.
o SINGLE operator: stations from the same location, operated by the same operator and using
one callsign on all bands, with no operational assistance of another person during the contest.
o 6 HOURS: stations from the same location, operated by any number of operators and operating
according to the 6 hours’ time rule. The 6 hour time segment can be divided into maximum two
periods. The time of the first QSO sets the start time of the first period. When operating in two
periods, the pause between the periods must be longer than 2 hours. The first time difference of
2 hours or more between two consecutive QSOs marks the pause segment. Only the QSOs
that fall into the combined 6 hour time segment will be counted for points. Participants are
welcome to operate longer than 6 hours and in such case they shall send their complete log
(the contest robot will automatically extract the 6 hours part from the log, while the rest of the
log entries will be used for cross-checking purposes).
o LOW POWER: multi or single operator entries, transmitting with total of up to 100 W PEP from
the transmitter and using only one directional or omnidirectional antenna system. The same
antenna must be used for transmit and receive. Directional antenna system is a single
directional antenna or a group (array) of single directional antennas, grouped together to
achieve maximum obtainable gain in a given direction (that is, all the antennas in the group
shall be pointed in the same direction). Omnidirectional antenna is an antenna with a radiation
pattern that has approximately the same gain in all azimuth directions.

Conditions for entrants


All licensed radio amateurs in Region 1 may participate in the contest.

The entrants must operate within the letter and spirit of the contest. Entrants must operate according to the
license conditions of the country where the station resides. Stations operating under special high power
license can only entry as check logs.

VHF Handbook 9.00 76/180


IARU-R1
Date of contests
• IARU Region 1 50 MHz MGM Contest will begin on the third Saturday of April
• IARU Region 1 70 MHz MGM Contest will begin on the third Saturday of May
• IARU Region 1 50 MHz (CW-SSB Only) Contest will begin on the third Saturday of June
• IARU Region 1 70 MHz (CW-SSB Only) Contest will begin on the third Saturday of July
• IARU Region 1 145 MHz contest will begin on the first Saturday of September
• IARU Region 1 UHF/Microwaves contest will begin on the first Saturday of October.
Each contest will commence at 14:00 UTC on the Saturday and end at 14:00 UTC on the Sunday.

Contest sections
The contests shall comprise the following sections for:
50 MHz Contest:
• SINGLE (SO): single operator entries only CW/SSB)
• MULTI (MO): multi operator entries (only CW/SSB)
• 6HOURS (6H): 6 hours entries (only CW/SSB)
• SINGLE (SO-MGM): single operator entries MGM
• MULTI (MO-MGM): multi operator entries MGM
• 6HOURS (6H-MGM): 6 hours entries (MGM)
70 MHz Contest:
• SINGLE (SO): single operator entries (only CW/SSB)
• MULTI (MO): multi operator entries (only CW/SSB)
• SINGLE (SO-MGM): single operator entries MGM
• MULTI (MO-MGM): multi operator entries MGM
145 MHz contest:
• SINGLE (SO): single operator entries.
• MULTI (MO): multi operator entries.
• SINGLE LOW POWER (SO-LP): single operator low power entries.
• MULTI LOW POWER (MO-LP): multi operator low power entries.
• 6HOURS (6H): 6 hours entries.
435 MHz Band:
• SINGLE (SO): single operator entries.
• MULTI (MO): multi operator entries.
• SINGLE LOW POWER (SO-LP): single operator low power entries.
• MULTI LOW POWER (MO-LP): multi operator low power entries.
• 6HOURS (6H): 6 hours entries.
1.3 GHz, 2.4 GHz, 3.4 GHz, 5.7 GHz, 10 GHz bands and for the Millimetre group (the
combined group of amateur bands above 10 GHz):
• SINGLE (SO): single operator entries.
• MULTI (MO): multi operator entries.

Operating
Only one signal on the band is allowed at any time.
Station must operate from the same location throughout the contest time.

VHF Handbook 9.00 77/180


IARU-R1

Contacts
Each station may only be worked once per band. If a station is worked again on the same band, only one
contact may count for points. Any duplicate contacts should be logged without claim for points and clearly
marked as duplicates.

Contacts made via active repeaters and EME contacts do not count for points.

Competitors are obliged to follow the common definition for a valid QSO (as defined in the VHF Managers
Handbook and replicated below). The contest exchange (call, report, QSO number and locator) shall be
sent and confirmed on the band where the contact started and only during the contact.

No attempt should be made during the QSO or after the contest to obtain any part of the required
exchange information via other communication methods such as the Internet chat channel, WEBDSR and
remote receiver outside 500 metres diameter from the station location, DX Cluster, talk-back on another
amateur band, telephone etc.. Such a secondary method invalidates the contest QSO.
Correction of logged exchanges after the contest, by use of any database, recordings, email or other
method, is not allowed. The log should contain what happened (sent and received) in the band during the
contest.(VGC 2020)

Self-spotting is permitted on all media except the DX Cluster (sending lots of self-spots to chat rooms is
not recommended and is discouraged).

Acceptable examples when using a secondary method:


• “Shall we make a sked on 144.388?"
• "I have QRM, let's move to 144.218 kHz and start again"
• "Nothing received, please try again" and the QSO starts again
• "Thank you for a nice QSO" - Note: Only after the QSO has completed on the radio!

Unacceptable examples when using a secondary method:


• "I need your serial number"
• "Please repeat all information"
• “Please confirm <report>, <serial number>, <locator> etc.”

Definition for a valid contest QSO:


A valid contact is one where both operators during the contact have:
• mutually identified each other
• received a contest exchange, and
• received a confirmation of the successful identification and the reception of the contest exchange.

Type of emission
Contacts may be made in A1A(CW), J3E(SSB) or F3E(FM) (G3E(PM)).
MGM (Machine Generated Mode) modes are allowed only during the 50/70 MHz contest. Every MGM
contact shall be properly marked in the LOG with EDI mode code 7.

Contest exchanges
CW, SSB or FM/PM modes
Code numbers exchanged during each contact shall consist of the RS or RST report, followed by a serial
number commencing with 001 for the first contact on each band and increasing by one

VHF Handbook 9.00 78/180


IARU-R1
for each successive contact on that band. This exchange must immediately be followed by the complete
QTH locator (6 digit) of the sending station (examples: 59003 JO20DB or 579123 IN55CC).
All times must be logged in UTC.
Call signs logged must be the same as those exchanged over the air by the entrants during the QSO.
For contacts on 50 MHz, outside of Region 1, the received locator can be 4 digits and “MM” will be added
as 5th and 6th digit.
Correction of logged exchanges after the contest, by use of any database, recordings, email or other
method, is not allowed
MGM modes
Code numbers exchanged during each contact shall consist of the report (as appropriate for the mode in
use) and 4-character QTH locator (e.g. IO91). Serial number is not required.
All times must be logged in UTC.
Call signs logged must be the same as those exchanged over the air by the entrants during the QSO.
Correction of logged exchanges after the contest, by use of any database, recordings, email or other
method, is not allowed.

Scoring
50 and 70 MHz CW/SSB only, 145 MHz and UHF/Microwave Contests
For the amateur bands up to 10 GHz inclusive, points will be scored on the basis of one point per
kilometre, i.e. the calculated distance in kilometres will be truncated to an integer value and 1 km will be
added. The centre of each locator square is used for distance calculations. In order to make contest scores
comparable, for the conversion from degrees to kilometres a factor of 111.2 should be used when
calculating distances with the aid of the spherical geometry equation.

All QSOs including those with unique stations shall count for points (unique station is a station that
appears in the log of only one contest entrant).

For the combined higher bands (Millimetre group) the score will be the sum of the points scored on each of
the bands, using the following multiplication factors for the number of kilometres scored on each band:
• 24 GHz 1 x
• 47 GHz 2 x
• 76 GHz 3 x
• 122 GHz 4 x
• 134 GHz 8 x
• 245 GHz 10 x
50 and 70 MHz MGM Contests
The points will be scored on the basis of one point per kilometre, i.e. the calculated distance in kilometres
will be truncated to an integer value and 1 km will be added.
The centre of the Large Locator Square (e.g. IO84MM to IO91MM) is used for distance calculations. In
order to make contest scores comparable, for the conversion from degrees to kilometres a factor of 111.2
should be used when calculating distances with the aid of the spherical geometry equation.
A QSO between stations in the same Large Locator Square will count for 50 points.
All QSOs including those with unique stations shall count for points (unique station is a station that
appears in the log of only one contest entrant).
The final score is total kilometres worked multiplied by the number of large Locator Squares (e.g. IO91)
worked.
E.g. 10.000 (total qrb points) x 20 Large Locator Square = Final Score of 200.000 points

VHF Handbook 9.00 79/180


IARU-R1
Entries
50 and 70 MHz CW/SSB only, 145 MHz and UHF/Microwave Contests
The entries must be set out in EDI digital/electronic form (refer to VHF Managers Handbook, Part 3 section
5) separately for each frequency band. EDI header shall as a minimum contain the following fields:
• Callsign and WWL used (PCall and PWWLo)
• Section and band (PSect and PBand)
• Operators callsigns (RCall for SO entries, RCall and Mope1, Mope2,… for MO entries)
• E-mail address (RHBBS)
• TX power in watts (SPowe)
• Antenna (SAnte); it shall be clearly identifiable how many antenna systems were in use
Logs shall be sent no later than the second Monday following the contest weekend. Late entries will be
accepted as check logs.
By submitting the contest or check log, an entrant agrees that he / she has:
• understood the contest rules and agrees to be bound by them,
• operated according to all the rules and regulations that pertain to his and/or station license,
• agreed the cross-checked log may be made open to the public, except for the personal data in
PAdr1, PAdr2, RName, RAdr1, RAdr2, RPoCo, RCity, RCoun, RPhon and RHBBS lines of EDI file
format,
• agrees the contest organizer can score, amend, publish, republish, print, and otherwise distribute
(by any means including paper or electronic) the entry either in its original format, in any other
suitable format with or without modifications or combined with the entries from other contestants for
entry into the specific contest, other contests, or for other reasons including training, development
and advancement of amateur radio,
• accepts all decisions of the contest organizer as final.
50 and 70 MHz MGM Contests
Since MGM modes need proper software packages that can’t export their logs in EDI format, it has been
decided to permit the upload of WSJT-X and MSHV ADIF files.
For the 2021 year, ADIF files can be directly uploaded to the entry robot at https://iarulogs.rsgbcc.org/cgi-
bin/vhfenter.pl (thanks to RSGB); participants shall declare on the same page all the necessary fields to
convert the ADIF file into a valid EDI format :
• Callsign and WWL used (PCall and PWWLo)
• Section and band (PSect and PBand)
• Operators callsigns (RCall for SO entries, RCall and Mope1, Mope2,… for MO entries)
• E-mail address (RHBBS)
• TX power in watts (SPowe)
• Antenna (SAnte);
From 2022 the IARU Region 1 Contest Robot will be ready to allow ADIF upload.
Logs shall be sent no later than the second Monday following the contest weekend. Late entries will be
accepted as check logs.
By submitting the contest or check log, an entrant agrees that he / she has:
• understood the contest rules and agrees to be bound by them,
• operated according to all the rules and regulations that pertain to his and/or station license,
• agreed the cross-checked log may be made open to the public, except for the personal data in
PAdr1, PAdr2, RName, RAdr1, RAdr2, RPoCo, RCity, RCoun, RPhon and RHBBS lines of EDI file
format,
• agrees the contest organizer can score, amend, publish, republish, print, and otherwise distribute
(by any means including paper or electronic) the entry either in its original format, in any other
suitable format with or without modifications or combined with the entries from other contestants for
entry into the specific contest, other contests, or for other reasons including training, development
and advancement of amateur radio,

VHF Handbook 9.00 80/180


IARU-R1
• accepts all decisions of the contest organizer as final.
Stations eligible to win a prize
• In every category of all the IARU Region 1 Contests the stations willing to win their categories must
submit their logs individually to the IARU R1 Contest Robot within the 23:59 UTC of the Monday
after the contest (34 hours); only these stations will be eligible to the victory and prizes.
• If the first station in the classification did not send his log before the deadline to be eligible for
the victory (34 hours), then the first station which sent his log within the 34 hours deadline will
be the winner. (VGC 2020)

Judging of entries
All logs are checked using custom software and human judgement.

The claimed contact shall be disqualified for any error in the information logged by the entrant.
When there is high evidence that the error is due to the wrongly logged information of the transmitting
station (i.e. wrong date/time or call/UL) such a LOG shall not be used for adjudication purposes.
The final judging of the entries shall be the responsibility of the contest organizer whose decision shall be
final.

Entrants deliberately contravening any of these rules, attempting fraud or flagrantly disregarding the IARU
Region 1 band plans shall be disqualified. Each VHF Manager and/or national Contest Committee can
propose to the contest organizer disqualification or penalization of an entrant.

Awards
Section winners:
Certificates will be issued by the contest organizer to the winners of the sections on each band up to 10
GHz and for the Millimetre group.

Overall winners for UHF/Microwave contest:


The overall winner of the IARU Region 1 UHF/Microwaves contest will be declared separately for the SO
and MO sections.
For the overall results tables, the scores of the entrants operating on at least two of the following bands will
be combined, using an adaptive multiplier system:

Millimetre group
Note: SO entries to the 6H section on 435 MHz will be included in the Overall SO classification if the
entries on all bands are SO. MO entries to the 6H section on 435MHz will be included in the Overall MO
classification.

The band multipliers for the overall score are calculated as follows:
• The multiplier for 435 MHz is one.
• The multiplier for each of the other bands is equal to the winning score on the 435 MHz band divided
by the winning score on each band. The multiplier on each band for the SO and MO sections are
determined separately.
• Example:
o Winning score in SO on 435MHz is 200,000 points
o Winning score in SO on 1.3GHz is 20,000 points
o The multiplier for SO on 1.3GHz is 200,000 divided by 20,000 = 10
o So, all scores in SO on 1.3GHz are multiplied by 10 for the Overall SO results table
• The overall millimetre group scores are calculated according to rule 9 before the multiplier for the
millimetre group is calculated.

VHF Handbook 9.00 81/180


IARU-R1

RULES IARU REGION I ATV CONTEST


Goal
Stimulation of ATV activity by organizing a yearly international ATV contest.

Terms and Definitions


ATV contest: Competition of licensed or receive-only ATV stations in a certain period of time, on each
UHF/Microwave band on which ATV transmissions are allowed, using the mode(s) authorised for that
band. The distance between stations that make contacts on several bands define the number of earned
points.

Repeater: A public (amateur) service that (re)transmits received signals that are intended to be received
by more than one person.

Station: Any person (or group of persons using one call sign) within IARU Region 1 that is able to transmit
and/or receive Amateur Television signals from their own location or remotely, without being a repeater.
No more than one transmitter may be in use at the same time.

Rover station: Any station that is not fixed to one location that moves at least a minimum of five
kilometres. Every time location is changed the moving station should be considered as a new station with
the same call sign. For that reason a new log sheet and four digit code should be used by the moving
station.

Four digit code: Four random chosen digits. The digits shall neither be the same (e.g. 2222) nor
consecutive (e.g. 4567 or 5432).

Contact: Contacts are considered to be valid when a four digit code that is transmitted by another ATV
station is received. Contacts made via repeaters or transponders are not considered as a contact.

IARU locator: The six, eight or ten digits of the Maidenhead locator which is related to the longitude and
latitude coordinates of the actual position of the antennae that are used during the contact.

Vision report: The internationally recognized codes P0 to P5:


Analogue Digital
P0 No picture received No picture received
P1 Synchronisation with little picture Only occasional blocks visible
content
P2 Only large images (call sign etc.) Sufficient blocks to read call signs
perceivable
P3 Picture noisy but some detail resolved Some blocking
P4 Picture slightly noisy, but with good Occasional blocking
detail and resolution
P5 Noise-free picture Solid picture

Log sheet: A log sheet has a format not smaller than A4, containing all information that is needed to judge
the contacts made and claimed points. It consists of a standard cover sheet and data sheets for every
individual band
• A standard cover sheet contains the essential information required to judge the contest entry. The
following information shall be submitted:
o name and address of the (first) operator,
VHF Handbook 9.00 82/180
IARU-R1
o station call sign,
o IARU locator,
o bands used, with the transmitted four-digit code group used for each band,
o claimed score for each band.
The coversheet should show the signature of the (first) operator certifying the correctness of the log(s)
submitted. In case of digital delivery of the log, typed name is the alternative of the signature.
• Data sheets for every individual band containing the following columns in the order named:
- date,
- time in UTC,
- call sign of the station worked/seen,
- report sent: P# report followed by serial number,
- report received: P# report followed by serial number,
- (seen) four digit code,
- IARU locator received,
- number of points claimed.
It is strongly recommended to use the Excel sheet that is developed especially for this purpose (see
Appendix 3B).
Responsibilities
Contestants: Operate within the letter and spirit of the contest and in accordance with their licences of
their country. Stations operating under special high power licenses shall do so "hors concours".
Completion and delivery of the entry
National ATV manager, VHF manager or the National Contest Committee: Judge logs in time, send
the results within four weeks after the contest to the IARU ATV manager.

IARU ATV contest manager: Organize, judge logs in time, issue results within six weeks after the
contest.

Contest
Date of contest: The contest will be held in the second full weekend of June.

Duration of the contest: The contest will commence at 12:00 UTC on the Saturday and will end at 18:00
UTC on the Sunday. It is recommended that the national societies will run their ATV contests at the same
time as the IARU Region 1 ATV contest takes place.

Contacts: For contest scoring purposes a participating station may be worked or viewed only once on
each band. A roving station is considered as a new station, every time it has changed its location.

Contest exchanges: The following information shall be exchanged during a contact:


• Four digit code. For each band used, a transmitting station shall transmit the four digit code that
shall not change throughout the contest. For roving stations that changed location: both
transmissions should be verified by a new four digit code. For new contacts with stations that were
logged before; the roving station should request the involved stations to transmit a new four digit
code and mention those digits as remarks in their log sheet.
• THIS FOUR DIGIT CODE SHALL BE EXCHANGED IN VIDEO ONLY AND SHALL NOT BE
TRANSMITTED BY ANY OTHER MODE THAN VISION.
• Call sign
• Vision report,
• IARU locator (the location of the receiving or transmitting antennae does define the location of the
station),
• Contact serial number, starting with 001 on each band used and increasing by one for each
successive contact on that band, starting from one for the new log sheet in use by roving stations).

VHF Handbook 9.00 83/180


IARU-R1

Scoring. A two-way exchange of the four-digit code group by vision together with the exchange of the
other information shall score:
• for contacts on the 435 MHz band: 2 points/kilometre
• for contacts on the 1.3 GHz band: 4 points/kilometre
• for contacts on higher bands: 10 points/kilometre
If only one station received the four-digit code group, and the other information was exchanged, the scores
for both stations shall be reduced by 50%.
Note: for scoring purposes all valid contacts shall be deemed to have taken place over a distance of at
least 5 kilometres, even if the two stations in contact have the same or adjacent IARU locators.
Entries: The entries must be set out on completed log sheets. A copy of the logs shall be sent to the
national ATV Manager, VHF Manager or the national Contest Committee, not later than the third Monday
following the contest weekend. The submission of the logs implies that the entrant accepts these contest
rules. The logs will be send at atv@iaru-r1.org, they will be forwarded to the organizing society

Judging of entries: The judging of the entries shall be the responsibility of the organizing society, whose
decision shall be final. Entrants deliberately contravening any of these rules or flagrantly disregarding the
IARU Region 1 band plans shall be disqualified. Minor errors may result in loss of points. The claimed
contact will be disqualified for an obviously wrongly stated locator, call sign, code number or a time error of
more than 10 minutes.

Awards: The winner on each band and the overall leading station shall receive a certificate. The
organizing society may also send certificates to all entrants if they wish so.

VHF Handbook 9.00 84/180


IARU-R1
PROCEDURE FOR ORGANISING IARU-R1 1 VHF/UHF/µWAVE
CONTESTS
The organisation of the IARU contests have been changed during the IARU General conference in
Landshut(2017).
It is proposed to create a team of experienced VHF contesters and contest robot owners/de-signers to
define common checking rules for automatic contest adjudication applications.

Terms of reference for the contest working group


Objectives
• Organisation and conduct of IARU-Region 1 VHF/UHF/SHF contests including:
o Collecting logs
o Evaluating and judging of the received logs
• Publication of official results in a timely manner
• Preparation of awards and certificates
• Encouragement of new participants, modes, activity and use of the higher frequency bands
• Promotion of IARU-Region 1 VHF/UHF/SHF to encourage participation - by website and other means
such as social media
Responsibilities
• To engage contesters both electronically and at major events such as Friedrichshafen where an annual
forum and awards ceremony might occur
• To maintain and modify contest rules as appropriate
• To further develop contest organisation
• To decide when and how the changes to the contest rules and contest organisation would be
implemented
• To maintain an appropriate ‘Contesting Handbook’ that would be the master refer-ence for the
Organisation and Rules of IARU Region-1 VHF/UHF/SHF Contests - including any directly associated
procedures and items such as log file formats
• To arrange for contest information, rules and results to be easily found online
• To coordinate the development of the contest robot
• Annual budgeting and expenditure, in cooperation with the C5 Chairman. This budget needs to be
approved by the EC.
• To provide a yearly report to EC
• To provide reports to C5 meetings
• To operate in an open and transparent way including:
o Regular consultation of contest managers and contesters
o Ensure that there is at least 6 months’ notice period before any agreed contest rule changes
are implemented
o In case of serious problems, appeals (or strategic issues), C5/EC would continue to be the
arbiter
Group Membership
The Working Group consists of:
• C5 Contest Co-Ordinator
• C5 Chair
• up to seven additional ordinary members
• Members shall be active contesters. Of the ordinary members, at least one needs to be:
o Robot/IT expert
o VHF/UHF specialist
o Microwave specialist

VHF Handbook 9.00 85/180


IARU-R1
Actual membership
• C5 Contest Co-Ordinator : IV3KKW
• C5 Chair: PA2DW
• Project manager: PE1ITR
• Members: OE1MCU, OK1VAO, F5LEN, S53WW, OM3BH, HA0LC, G0FCT, YU1LA.

Financing and management of the contest robot (VGC2020)


• The contest robot is operated by the ÖVSV for the IARU under Austrian law
• The programming will be continued by Indiware (Barbara Langwieser)
• We appoint PE1ITR from the C5CWG to the project leader and single contact person to Indiware for
the necessary adoptions and improvements, within the approved budget.
• PE1ITR will provide a transparent system with a backlog and work list of all improvements and bugs.
• PE1ITR gets access to the technical specifications and structure of the current IARU Contest robot.
• PE1ITR bring in a request from CHF 2150,-- + CHF 2200,-- = CHF 4350,-- into the C2 meeting.
• The expectation is that is that an annual amount of CHF 2150,-- is needed that must be supported by
the actual backlog and work list.

Sub-regional VHF/UHF/µWave contest coordination within IARU-R1


It is recommended that the national and sub-regional activity contests rules should be complementary and
that those contests should be open to all (National and International contesters) to encourage and promote
activity on the VHF, UHF and SHF bands.

In order to avoid confusion and improve efficiency, the submission of contest entries shall be no later than
the second Monday after the contest, which is in accordance with the rules approved by IARU Region 1.
(Varna 2014)

MONTHLY DIGITAL ACTIVITY CONTEST (VGC 2020)


Each MS organizes monthly digital weak signal mode activity contests as described above according to
this schedule:
• the 1st Wednesday of the month from 17:00 to 20:00 UTC on the 144 MHz band.
• the 2nd Wednesday of the month from 17:00 to 20:00 UTC on the 432 MHz band.
The contest managers share the QSO records in the logs for cross checking.
If it is not possible for an MS to organize this activity contests herself, she will at least advertise this activity
in her publications.

VHF Handbook 9.00 86/180


IARU-R1
MGM CONTEST OPERATING PROCEDURES
Introduction
MGM is now a mainstream mode alongside SSB and CW for the exchange of contest information,
facilitated by the widespread and low cost availability of PCs and free software.
• The main purpose of this guide is to provide a protocol for the efficient exchange of contest
information when using MGM. However, you will not be penalised for using a different protocol so long
as the complete contest exchange only takes place over the air.
• The protocol is an extension of standard meteor scatter procedures to include contest information, and
the description is based around the standard WSJT-10 messages and modes (the most commonly used
in contests), although the same messages may be used with other Machine Generated Modes such as
PSK which are not included in the WSJT suite.
• This Guide does not describe the interconnections between PC and transceiver, since such information
is readily available on the internet. All that is required is PTT control via the PC and line in/out
connections for transmit and receive audio.
• This Guide does not describe how to set up or optimise the use of MGM software, nor does it compare
the merits of different software applications.

What needs to be logged?


In VHF contests the following needs to be received over the air and logged accurately by both parties to a
contest exchange:
• both calls
• report (as appropriate for the mode in use)
• Large Square Locator (4 digit e.g. IO91)
Serial number is not required

VHF Handbook 9.00 87/180


IARU-R1
VHF& UP TROPHY (VGC 2020)
C5CWG propose to use 2021 year to start to collect all the information needed, prepare the
contest robot, then start with the official IARU Reg. 1 VHF & Up Trophy in 2022.
Objective
The main objective is to increase the contest activity during the entire year in all the IARU Region 1
countries on all the bands from 145 MHz to microwaves.

Dates and bands


• 1st weekend of March : 1st Subregional contest 145 MHz & Up
• 1st weekend of May: 2nd Subregional contest 145 MHz & Up
• 1st weekend of June : Microwave Subregional Contest 1296 MHz and up
• 1st weekend of July: 3rd Subregional contest 145 MHz & Up
• 1st weekend of September : IARU Region 1 145 MHz contest
• 1st weekend of October : IARU Region 1 UHF & Up Contest (435 MHz & up)
• 1st weekend of November : Marconi Memorial Contest 145 MHz (Only CW)

Rules
• The normal rules like described in the contest rules of the IARU Region 1 VHF Handbook (Part 3, Section
1) are applicable.
• If participating in the one of the contests in the list in multiple bands, a different log is needed per
band.
• You need to participate on the same band and category on at least all the contests in the calendar
except one.
• The final score is the sum of the points of each contest where the station participated.

Categories:
145 MHz band:
• SINGLE (SO): single operator entries.
• MULTI (MO): multi operator entries.
• SINGLE LOW POWER (SO-LP): single operator low power entries.
• MULTI LOW POWER (MO-LP): multi operator low power entries.
• 6 HOURS (6H): 6 hours entries.
435 MHz band:
• SINGLE (SO): single operator entries.
• MULTI (MO): multi operator entries.
• SINGLE LOW POWER (SO-LP): single operator low power entries.
• MULTI LOW POWER (MO-LP): multi operator low power entries.
• 6 HOURS (6H): 6 hours entries.

1.3 GHz, 2.4 GHz, 3.4 GHz, 5.7 GHz, 10 GHz bands and for the Millimetre group (the
combined group of amateur bands above 10 GHz):
• SINGLE (SO): single operator entries.
• MULTI (MO): multi operator entries.

In the IARU R1 Trophy the Overall category is not included.

VHF Handbook 9.00 88/180


IARU-R1

ELECTRONIC CONTEST LOG EXCHANGE


Introduction
At its meeting in Vienna 1998 the VHF/UHF/Microwaves Committee has recommended the use of the
Electronic Contest Log distribution format for the exchange of log information concerning IARU Region 1
Contests. This recommendation has been endorsed by the IARU R1 EC at its 1998 meeting.

The aim of the common file format is to make contest log programmers able to deliver a standard output
file from their programs, to enable contest managers to receive logs via data transfer system (e.g.
diskettes, Internet) introduce electronic log processing and ease submission for participants.

What media to use is not specified, and is up to the contest manager. If Internet is a reliable medium it is a
good choice, however, that does not solve yet the legal issue with the responsible operators signature yet
required for IARU Region 1 contests.

When a contest manager invites to a contest she/he should state if electronic log submission is possible, in
what way (e.g. INTERNET) and where (managers E-mail address), just like own mailing address. Contest
managers must have a validation program to make a complete validation including cross checking etc.
Contest participants can use the electronic data file format to submit their logs to the contest manager in
time. To be able to do this, participants must use a contest program capable of generating a REG1TEST
file.
Note: Many logging programmes do not yet accept a non-numeric character for the T part of the report.
Users shall check this according to the recommendation in section.

Logbook programs supporting EDI


• http://www.rudius.net/oz2m/taclog/
• http://www.ucxlog.org/
• http://www.win-test.com/
• http://lea.hamradio.si/~s52aa/vhfctest4win/
• http://saigacontest.gmxhome.de/
• http://www.n1mm.com/
• https://www.ik3qar.it/software/qartest/it/download/
• http://tucnak.nagano.cz/old/tucnak1en.html

VHF Handbook 9.00 89/180


IARU-R1
Standard format for Electronic Contest Log Exchange (Vienna 1998)

Electronic Data Interchange - EDI-file format for contests in Region 1 above 30 MHz. This document is the
specification for the Region 1 above 30 MHz contest file formats. Examples for commonly known contests
are shown in the appendix.
The aim is to make contest-log programmers able to deliver a standard (file) format from their programs, to
enable contest managers to receive log data through various types of digital communication systems e.g.
diskettes, e-mail, etc; for electronic evaluation purposes. (Prepared by: Bo Hansen, OZ1FDJ, Søren
Pedersen, OZ1FTU)

Format
[REG1TEST;1]File identifier; file version
TName= Contest name
TDate= Beginning;ending date of contest
PCall= Callsign used
PWWLo= WWL used
PExch= Exchange used
PAdr1= Address line 1 from where the contest took place
PAdr2= Address line 2 from where the contest took place
PSect= Section in which station participates
PBand= Band used during the contest
PClub= Club station where points can be accumulated
RName= Name of responsible operator
RCall= Callsign of responsible operator
RAdr1= Address line 1 of responsible operator
RAdr2= Address line 2 of responsible operator
RPoCo= Postal code of responsible operator
RCity= City of responsible operator
RCoun= Country of responsible operator
RPhon= Phone number of responsible operator
RHBBS= Home BBS of responsible operator
MOpe1= Multi operator line 1
MOpe2= Multi operator line 2
STXEq= TX equipment
SPowe= TX power [W]
SRXEq= RX equipment
SAnte= Antenna
SAntH= Antenna height above ground level [m];height above sea level [m]
CQSOs= Claimed number of valid QSOs;Band multiplier
CQSOP= Claimed number of QSO-points
CWWLs= Claimed number of WWLs;Bonus per each new WWL;WWL multiplier
CWWLB= Claimed number of WWL bonus points
CExcs= Claimed number of Exchanges;Bonus per each new Exchange;Exchange multiplier
CExcB= Claimed number of Exchange bonus points
CDXCs= Claimed number of DXCCs;Bonus per each new DXCC;DXCC multiplier
CDXCB= Claimed number DXCC bonus
CToSc= Claimed total score
CODXC= Call;WWL;distanceBest DX contact
[Remarks]Remarks identifier
Remarks lines

VHF Handbook 9.00 90/180


IARU-R1
[QSORecords;Number of QSO records following]QSO records identifier;number of QSO records following
Date;Time;Call;Mode code;Sent-RST;Sent QSO number;Received-RST;Received QSO number; Received
exchange;Received-WWL;QSO-Points;New-Exchange-(N);New-WWL-(N);New-DXCC-(N);Duplicate-QSO-
(D)

Explanation of keywords in header


Keywords are defined as the word in front of the actual argument. The keyword is separated from the
argument with an equal sign (=).
[REG1TEST;1]
REG1TEST;1 is the file identifier and the file version. It serves as indicator for which format and version is
being used and where data begins.
TName
Argument describes the name of the contest in which the station participated.
TDate
Arguments describe the beginning and ending dates of the contest. Arguments are separated with a
semicolon (;). Arguments are written as YYYYMMDD.
PCall
Argument describes the callsign used during the contest.
PWWLo
Argument describes own World Wide Locator (WWL, Maidenhead, Universal Locator) used during the
contest. Maximum length is six characters.
PExch
Argument describes own Exchange during the contest. This can be any type of information, e.g. Province,
DOK, County, State, Power, Name. Maximum length is six characters.
PAdr1
Argument describes the address of the QTH used during the contest, line 1.
PAdr2
Argument describes the address of the QTH used during the contest, line 2.
PSect
Argument describes in which section the station is participating. Synonyms to the meaning Asection@ are:
class, category, group etc.
Section PSection
SINGLE SO, SINGLE, SINGLE-OP
MULTI MO, MULTI, MULTI-OP
6 HOURS SINGLE SO-6H, SINGLE-OP-6H
6 HOURS MULTI MO-6H, MULTI-OP-6H
SINGLE with MGM SO-MGM, SINGLE-OP-MGM
MULTI with MGM MO-MGM, MULTI-OP-MGM
PBand
Argument describe which band was used during the contest. Please note the bands and which frequency
range they represent in the table below:
Frequency PBand
50 - 54 MHz 50 MHz
70 - 70,5 MHz 70 MHz
144 - 148 MHz 145 MHz
430 - 440 MHz 435 MHz
1240 - 1300 MHz 1,3 GHz
2300 - 2450 MHz 2,3 GHz
3400 - 3600 MHz 3,4 GHz
5650 - 5850 MHz 5,7 GHz
10,0 - 10,5 GHz 10 GHz
24,0 - 24,25 GHz 24 GHz

VHF Handbook 9.00 91/180


IARU-R1
47,0 - 47,2 GHz 47 GHz
75,5 - 81 GHz 76 GHz
120 - 120 GHz 120 GHz
142 - 148 GHz 144 GHz
241 - 250 GHz 248 GHz
PClub
Argument describes the callsign of the radio club where operator(s) are member. Can be used if points are
accumulated to the club etc.
RName
Argument describes the given- and surname of the responsible operator.
RCall
Argument describes the callsign of the responsible operator.
Adr1
Argument describes the address of the responsible operator, line 1.
RAdr2
Argument describes the address of the responsible operator, line 2.
RPoCo
Argument describes the postal code of the responsible operator.
RCity
Argument describes the city of the responsible operator.
RCoun
Argument describes the country of the responsible operator.
RPhon
Argument describes the telephone number of the responsible operator.
RHBBS
Argument describes the Bulletin Board System or electronic mail address of the responsible operator.
MOpe1
Arguments describe the operators participating in the contest, line 1. All arguments separated with a
semicolon (;). Responsible operator is not needed in this argument.
MOpe2
Arguments describe the operators participating in the contest, line 2. All arguments are separated with a
semicolon (;).Responsible operator is not needed in this argument.
STXEq
Argument describes the transmitting equipment used during the contest.
SPowe
Argument describes the transmitting power used during the contest, unit is Watt.
SRXEq
Argument describes the receiving equipment used during the contest.
SAnte
Argument describes the antenna system used during the contest.
SAntH
Arguments describe the antenna height above ground level and sea level, unit is meter. All arguments
separated with a semicolon (;).
CQSOs
Arguments describe the claimed number of valid QSOs and the band multiplier. All arguments are
separated with a semicolon (;).
CQSOP
Argument describes the claimed total number of QSO-points. The format does not specify that QSO-points
can only be based upon distances.
CWWLs
Arguments describe the claimed number of WWLs worked, the number of bonus points claimed for each
new WWL and the WWL multiplier. All arguments are separated with a semicolon (;).

VHF Handbook 9.00 92/180


IARU-R1
If no bonus points are claimed then bonus points per each new WWL are set to zero (0). If no multiplication
is used for each new WWL the multiplier is set to one (1).
CWWLB
Argument describes the claimed total number of WWL bonus points.
CExcs
Arguments describe the claimed number of Exchanges worked, the number of bonus points claimed for
each new Exchange and the Exchange multiplier. All arguments are separated with a semicolon (;).
If no bonus points are claimed then bonus points per each new Exchange are set to zero (0). If no
multiplication is used for each new Exchange the multiplier is set to one (1).
CExcB
Argument describes the claimed total number of Exchange bonus points.
CDXCs
Arguments describe the claimed number of DXCCs worked, the number of bonus points claimed for each
new DXCC and the DXCC multiplier. All arguments are separated with a semicolon (;).
If no bonus points are claimed then bonus points per each new DXCC are set to zero (0). If no
multiplication is used for each new DXCC the multiplier is set to one (1).
CDXCB
Argument describes the claimed total number of DXCC bonus points.
CToSc
Argument describes the total claimed score. The format does not specify how the total score is calculated.
CODXC
Arguments describe the claimed ODX contact call, WWL and distance. All arguments are separated with a
semicolon (;).
[Remarks]
The [Remarks] identifier is used to mark where the Remarks begins. All lines following, until
[QSORecords;Number of QSO records following], are remarks. If no remarks are written identifier must still
be present.
Remarks lines
Remarks lines are where the station may write comments to the test. The number of lines is variable. All
lines in between [Remarks] and [QSORecords;Number of QSO records following] are remarks.
[QSORecords;Number of QSO records following]
The [QSORecords;Number of QSO records following] is the QSO record identifier used to mark where
QSO records begins, and how many consecutive QSO records to follow.

VHF Handbook 9.00 93/180


IARU-R1
QSO record definition
Date;Time;Call;Mode code;Sent-RST;Sent QSO number;Received RST;Received QSO number;Received
Exchange;Received-WWL;QSO-Points;New-Exchange-(N);New-WWL-(N);New-DXCC-(N);Duplicate-
QSO-(D) All arguments are separated with a semicolon (;).All fields in the QSO record is written on the
same line, and ending with ASCII characters 13 and 10 (CR LF).
Field Content Maximum
Date YYMMDD, 6 characters 6
Time UTC, 4 characters, with leading zeros 4
Call 3 to 14 characters 14
Mode code 0 or 1 character 1
Sent-RST 0 or 2 or 3 characters 3
Sent QSO number 0 or 3 or 4 characters, with leading zeros 4
Received-RST 0 or 2 or 3 characters 3
Received QSO number 0 or 3 or 4 characters, with leading zeros 4
Received Exchange 0 or 1 to 6 characters (see also PExch) 6
Received WWL 0 or 4 or 6 characters, World Wide Locator 6
QSO points 1 to 6 characters, including bandmultiplier 6
New-Exchange 0 or 1 character, "N" if QSO is a new exchange 1
New-WWL 0 or 1 character, "N" if QSO is a new WWL 1
New-DXCC 0 or 1 character, "N" if QSO is a new DXCCL 1
Duplicate-QSO 0 or 1 character, "D" if contact is a duplicate QSO 1
61
+ field separators, 14 = 75

Mode code
The mode code is used to show which modes were used for the QSO. Below is a list of the code with
corresponding modes.

Mode code TX mode RX mode


0 none of below none of below
1 SSB SSB
2 CW CW
3 SSB CW
4 CW SSB
5 AM AM
6 FM FM
7 RTTY - MGM RTTY – MGM (Varna 2014)
8 SSTV SSTV
9 ATV ATV
If the mode is not important it can be left blank, i.e. not stated in rules/invitation.

Characters
Used characters are in accordance with the 7-bit ASCII alphabet and only characters with the following
decimal number are allowed 10, 13, 32-127.
Line length
If line length is already specified it must not be exceeded, other lines must not exceed a length of 75
characters. Length is limited due to Packet Radio transferral.
All lines, in the format description, with the "F" denote that entry is a free format. This means that any of
the above characters in the 7-bit ASCII alphabet can be used.

VHF Handbook 9.00 94/180


IARU-R1
All other entries are forced format and characters, as above, are in capital. All numbers in forced format
are positive integers and non-exponential notation and entry cannot be left empty, i.e. 0 (zero) or greater.
All forced formats must be in accordance with SI-units (Système International).

Separator (;)
This separator semicolon (;) is written to separate multiple information on same line.
If the format is used for a contest which does not use some of the QSO exchanges, i.e. QSO no., WWL
and Exchange, these fields are left blank. Proper interpretation must be ensured by manager program.

Faulty QSOs
A duplicate QSO is marked with a "D" in the Duplicate-QSO field, and the QSO-points field is set to 0
(zero). The format does not define when a QSO is a duplicate.
An incomplete QSO is written with the information received, and the QSO-points field is set to zero (0).
In case of a mistake, an error mark must be inserted in the Callsign field to keep a correct flow in the
number of QSOs records. The error mark must be an "ERROR" and the other fields except Time and Sent
QSO no., if used, can be left empty. In case the empty field is accumulated, e.g. QSO-points, it is set to 0
(zero).

QSO numbers
The format does not define in what order the QSO numbers must be listed. It is possible to use the format
to submit logs for contests requiring consecutive numbers for all QSOs, even if they are on different bands.

Missing information
If a contest log program cannot fill in all the information, the missing information can be left blank, except if
information is needed for claiming/calculating scores, e.g. log program cannot identify WWLs, DXCCs etc.
If the information is required for the scores this log program cannot be used for this particular contest
anyway.

The following section describes different EDI-files for various commonly known contest types.

Example: Region 1 Contest, standard type


[REG1TEST;1]
TName=IARU Region 1, March contest VHF
TDate=19950304;19950305
PCall=OZ1FDJ
PWWLo=JO65FR
PExch=
PAdr1=Herlevgaardsvej 32 A, st. tv., DK-2730 Herlev
PAdr2=
PSect=Multi operator
PBand=144 MHz
PClub=OZ2AGR
RName=Bo Hansen
RCall=OZ1FDJ
RAdr1=Herlevgaardsvej 32 A, st. tv.
RAdr2=
RPoCo=DK-2730
RCity=Herlev
RCoun=DENMARK
RPhon=(+45) 42 91 53 98
RHBBS=OZ6BBS

VHF Handbook 9.00 95/180


IARU-R1
MOpe1=OZ1FTU
MOpe2=
STXEq=FT-225RD+MRF247
SPowe=90
SRXEq=FT-225RD+MuTek+BF981 1,5 dB NF
SAnte=9 elements OZ5HF
SAntH=14;41
CQSOs=24;1
CQSOP=11579
CWWLs=19;0;1
CWWLB=0
CExcs=0;0;1
CExcB=0
CDXCs=7;0;1
CDXCB=0
CToSc=11579
CODXC=OY9JD;IP62OA;1302
[Remarks]
Nice with the Aurora, made it possible to work more than usual
in a 24 h contest. Nice to hear Jon (OY9JD) again, but, many
stations calling so no time for chat.
Besides the Aurora there was only little activity, as usual, in Scandinavia.
[QSORecords;26]
950304;1445;OZ9SIG;1;59;001;59;006;;JO65ER;6;;N;N;
950304;1446;DL5BBF;1;54;002;59;023;;JO42LT;396;;N;N;
950304;1449;OZ1HLB/P;1;59;003;59;015;;JO55US;48;;N;;
950304;1450;DL6FBL;1;53;004;51;092;;JO40XL;608;;N;;
950304;1454;DF0TAU;1;54;005;59;084;;JO40QO;606;;;;
950304;1508;DJ3QP;1;55;006;59;095;;JO42FB;485;;;;
950304;1510;DG5TR;1;53;007;53;006;;JO53QP;242;;N;;
950304;1519;DL0WU;1;55;008;53;108;;JO31OF;609;;N;;
950304;1528;DL3LAB;1;59;009;59;046;;JO44XS;191;;N;;
950304;1532;DL5XV;1;56;010;59;033;;JO53AO;283;;;;
950304;1544;OZ8RY/A;1;56;011;57;010;;JO66HB;39;;N;;
950304;1553;OZ1AOO;1;59;012;59;001;;JO65FR;1;;;;
950304;1603;ERROR;;;013;;;;;0;;;;
950304;1618;DL0WX;1;53;014;52;174;;JO30FQ;688;;N;;
950304;1626;SM4HFI;2;53A;015;54A;019;;JP70TO;573;;N;N;
950304;1631;GM4YXI;2;57A;016;55A;015;;IO87WI;911;;N;N;
950304;1636;OH2AAQ;2;52A;017;59A;015;;KO29FX;851;;N;N;
950304;1640;OH2BNH;2;55A;018;57A;024;;KP20LG;891;;N;;
950304;1641;LA2AB;1;59A;019;57A;027;;JO59FV;479;;N;N;
950304;1646;SM5BSZ;2;55A;020;57A;029;;JO89IJ;480;;N;;
950304;1700;SK5BN;2;51A;021;55A;026;;JP80UE;585;;N;;
950304;1720;DL9LBA;2;529;022;559;056;;JO44UP;213;;;;
950304;1730;SK6NP;2;559;023;539;029;;JO68MB;262;;N;;
950304;1736;OH1MDR;2;52A;024;57A;023;;KP01VJ;830;;N;;
950304;1739;OY9JD;2;51A;025;52A;011;;IP62OA;1302;;N;N;
950304;1826;OZ9SIG;1;59;026;59;006;;JO65ER;0;;;;D

VHF Handbook 9.00 96/180


IARU-R1
Example : AGCW DL VHF Contest (contest manager: DJ2QZ)
[REG1TEST;1]
TName=AGCW contest 2 m
TDate=19950318;19950318
PCall=OZ1FDJ
PWWLo=JO65FR
PExch=C
PAdr1=Herlevgaardsvej 32 A, st. tv., DK-2730 Herlev
PAdr2=
PSect=C
PBand=144 MHz
PClub=OZ2AGR
RName=Bo Hansen
RCall=OZ1FDJ
RAdr1=Herlevgaardsvej 32 A, st. tv.
RAdr2=
RPoCo=DK-2730
RCity=Herlev
RCoun=DENMARK
RPhon=(+45) 42 91 53 98
RHBBS=OZ6BBS
MOpe1=
MOpe2=
STXEq=FT-225RD+MRF247
SPowe=90
SRXEq=FT-225RD+MuTek+BF981 1,5 dB NF
SAnte=9 elements OZ5HF
SAntH=14;41
CQSOs=24;1
CQSOP=11579
CWWLs=19;500;1
CWWLB=9500
CExcs=3;0;1
CExcB=0
CDXCs=7;0;1
CDXCB=0
CToSc=11579
CODXC=OY9JD;IP62OA;1302
[Remarks]
Nice with the Aurora, made it possible to work more than usual.
Nice to hear Jon (OY9JD) again, but, many stations calling so no time for chat.
Besides the Aurora there was only little activity, as usual, in Scandinavia.
[QSORecords;26]
950318;1600;OZ9SIG;2;599;001;599;006;B;JO65ER;6;N;N;N;
950318;1602;DL5BBF;2;549;002;599;023;C;JO42LT;396;N;N;N;
950318;1607;OZ1HLB/P;2;599;003;599;015;C;JO55US;48;;N;;
950318;1609;DL6FBL;2;539;004;519;092;C;JO40XL;608;;N;;
950318;1614;DF0TAU;2;549;005;599;084;B;JO40QO;606;;;;
950318;1618;DJ3QP;2;559;006;599;095;C;JO42FB;485;;;;
950318;1625;DG5TR;2;539;007;539;006;A;JO53QP;242;N;N;;
950318;1628;DL0WU;2;559;008;539;108;C;JO31OF;609;;N;;
950318;1630;DL3LAB;2;599;009;599;046;C;JO44XS;191;;N;;

VHF Handbook 9.00 97/180


IARU-R1
950318;1632;DL5XV;2;569;010;599;033;C;JO53AO;283;;;;
950318;1644;OZ8RY/A;2;569;011;579;010;A;JO66HB;39;;N;;
950318;1653;OZ1AOO;2;599;012;599;001;A;JO65FR;1;;;;
950318;1703;ERROR;;;013;;;;;0;;;;
950318;1718;DL0WX;2;539;014;529;174;C;JO30FQ;688;;N;;
950318;1726;SM4HFI;2;53A;015;54A;019;C;JP70TO;573;;N;N;
950318;1731;GM4YXI;2;57A;016;55A;015;C;IO87WI;911;;N;N;
950318;1736;OH2AAQ;2;52A;017;59A;015;C;KO29FX;851;;N;N;

VHF Handbook 9.00 98/180


IARU-R1
AUTOMATIC CONTEST ADJUCTION SOFTWARE
In this section we will explain the working of the contest robot and give guidelines for other member
societies who want to make their own contest robot. (Vienna 2016)

VHF Handbook 9.00 99/180


IARU-R1

PART 4
OPERATIONAL & TECHNICAL
REFERENCES

VHF Handbook 9.00 100/180


IARU-R1
ENCOURAGING INOVATIONS(VGC 2020)
To encourage multinational amateur radio interest groups to promote and document their innovations for
the sake of radio amateur activities through IARU (R1). Their experience and know-how can be an added
value for the amateur community and IARU Member Societies.
This would not impact the way in which proposals are presented to the Region for General Conferences.
This initiative should also be taken into account in framing the Terms of Reference for the proposed TWG

Wideband experimentations (VGC 2020)


A framework for wideband experimentation the amateur bands be developed by opening up new
designated segments of existing and new bands for free experimentation with unheard of modulation
modes and techniques

OPERATING PROCEDURES
Minimum Requirement for a valid QSO
A definition for a valid QSO on VHF and on higher bands is:-
A valid contact is one where both operators during the contact have
• mutually identified each other
• received a report, and
• received a confirmation of the successful identification and the reception of the report.

It is emphasized that the responsibility always lies with the operator for the integrity of the contact.

Weak-signal QSO procedure

Terrestrial signals may often be heard on the VHF bands that are weak and suffering from considerable
fading. It will be helpful in these circumstances to be able to resort to an operating procedure that maximises
the possibility of a contact.
The procedure described here is primarily for CW and SSB contacts although the principle may be
adapted for other communication techniques if required.
The Basis of the Procedure
Imagine that two stations can hear each other but signals are very weak and suffering from considerable
fading. This is often experienced on the 50MHz, 70MHz and 144MHz bands during poor tropospheric
propagation conditions. These two stations may attempt to contact each other but can often be transmitting
(or receiving) at the same time. Therefore the QSO is most likely to fail. Somehow you need to be able to
drop into a timed period mode to enhance the chance of making a QSO. But which station starts the first
timed period?
This may simply be achieved from the way you are beaming your directional antenna.
So, for example, if you hear a station when you are beaming WEST (or NORTH) and *hopefully* the other
station is beaming EAST (or SOUTH) then both stations can drop into a timed sequence because they will
know approximately where the other station is.
Procedure
The weak-signal QSO procedure commences by ascertaining from your beam-heading which station starts
the first 1-minute period.
• If you are beaming SOUTH or EAST you start the first (even) 1-minute period.
For example: 00-01, 02-03, 04-05 ……. and so on 54-55, 56-57, 58-59….

VHF Handbook 9.00 101/180


IARU-R1
• If you are beaming NORTH or WEST you start in the second (odd) 1-minute period.
For example: 01-02, 03-04, 05-06 ……. and so on 55-56, 57-58, 59-60….
Stations alternately call each other until signals are heard.
• QRZ G4ASR ... QRZ G4ASR ... OVER ( or K on CW)
When the call sign of the calling station is heard insert a conventional tropo report (3 times)
• F6ETI G4ASR 52 52 52 ... F6ETI G4ASR 52 52 52 ... OVER (K)
Reply with a confirmation roger report (3 times)
• G4ASR F6ETI R57 R57 R57 ... G4ASR F6ETI R57 R57 R57 ... OVER (K)
Confirm with a string of rogers (3 times)
• F6ETI G4ASR Roger Roger Roger ... OVER (K)
• G4ASR F6ETI Roger Roger Roger ... OVER (K)
Valid Contacts
A valid contact is one where each operator has copied both call signs, the report and a confirmation that the
other operator has done the same. This confirmation may either be an "R" preceding the report or a string
of three consecutive "rogers” (RRR).

This procedure may also be used for contest contacts by inserting the appropriate contest exchange
requirements within the 1-minute periods.

Operating code of practice for 50 MHz operators


50 MHz as a DX band
It should be recognised by all 50 MHz operators that 50 MHz is a DX band. All 50 MHz operators should
always treat each other with respect and tolerance.
Band plan
Always respect the band plan as issued by IARU, taking into account the conditions of your license.
Local QSO's
Do not conduct local QSO's within the 50.100 to 50.130 MHz window for Intercontinental contacts.
Learn to listen
True 50 MHz band DX'ers spend about five percent of their time transmitting while ninety-five percent of
time is spent listening and observing changing band conditions and propagation modes. This will be far
more effective than just calling CQ DX at random.
50.100 - 50.130 MHz window for intercontinental contacts
This Window is widely accepted and should be used for Inter-continental QSO's only.
50.110 MHz Intercontinental calling frequency
This should be used for Intercontinental contacts only. Do not under any circumstances engage in local
continental QSO's on this frequency even for a minute or two. Do not encourage pile-ups on 50.110 MHz.
50.110 MHz CQ'ing
LISTENING is the first rule of working rare DX on the 50 MHz band. So think twice before calling CQ on
50.110 MHz. But the occasional CQ is good as it can discover an unrecognised opening.
QSO techniques
Follow the style and take the lead of the DX operator in providing information. Otherwise keep it simple as
there are other stations waiting in line.
DX pile-up operating
You should listen to the DX stations carefully and not continue to call if they request a particular country or
prefix if that is not you. You should NOT call if you cannot hear the DX station!
Split frequency operation
When a DX station creates a large pile-up, split-frequency operation is recommended. To minimise
interference with other DX stations operating simplex, it is recommended that a maximum split
of 10 kHz is used.
VHF Handbook 9.00 102/180
IARU-R1
Duplicate QSO’s
It is always tempting to call a rare DX station every time you hear it. This should be avoided as it means
that you are taking away the opportunity for the DX station to work a new station and give them their first
QSO with the DX country.
Telegraphy operation
Telegraphy is probably the best mode of operation on the 50 MHz band due to the nature of many DX
openings.
FM QSO’s in Europe
All FM transmissions should be made above 50.500 MHz for the obvious reason that FM is wideband and
could wipe out weak DX signals.

Mutual interference
Proper adjustment of transmitters will minimise distortion and reduce interference with operators on nearby
frequencies. The correct level of audio setting for the microphone in use is essential for readability and
minimal distortion. Linear amplifiers should be only driven so that they operate in the linear region and in
any case should only be used when propagation conditions require it. Please note that poor receiver
performance with respect to adjacent channel rejection and overload will also limit your effectiveness.

Operating procedures for Meteor Scatter QSO's


Introduction
The goal of the procedures described is to enable valid contacts to be made by meteor scatter (MS)
reflection as quickly and easily as possible. Meteor scatter is unlike most other propagation modes, in that
neither station can hear the other until an ionised meteor trail exists to scatter or reflect the signals. As the
reflections are often of very short duration the normal QSO procedure is not readily applicable and
specialised operating techniques must be taken to ensure that a maximum of correct and unmistakable
information is received. The two stations have to take turns to transmit and receive information in a defined
format, following the procedures as detailed below. Some meteor showers are strong enough to make
some of these measures unnecessary, but to encourage use of all generally listed showers there is no
reason why the suggested procedures should not always be used. As with operating procedures in
general, the virtues of the MS operating procedures are mainly that they are standard and are widely
understood throughout IARU Region 1.
Scheduled and Random Contacts
Two types of MS contacts, arranged in different ways, may be distinguished:
• A scheduled contact, where two interested stations arrange in advance the frequency, timing,
transmission mode, e.g. Telegraphy, SSB or MGM and call signs to be used. Scheduling may be
carried out by exchange of letters or e-mail, by radio via the European VHF Net on 14,345 MHz, by
Internet chat-rooms, packet-radio etc.
• A non-scheduled contact, where a station calls CQ or responds to a CQ call, are called "random
contacts". Random contacts are far more difficult and because you are starting entirely from
scratch, it is particularly important for both stations to follow the standard meteor scatter QSO
procedures described in this document.
Timing
Prior to any MS activity it is absolutely vital that clocks need to be set to better than 1 second of standard
time. Any clock inaccuracy will result in wasted time. Accurate timing of transmit and receive periods is
important for two reasons: 1) to maximise the chances of hearing the other station, and 2) to avoid
interference between local stations. Accurate timing can be accomplished for example by checking against
the time-ticks on standard frequency transmissions, TV Teletext, telephone 'speaking-clock', GPS time
signals or the Internet.
The recommended time periods for the different modes are:
• Telegraphy: 2.5 minutes periods.

VHF Handbook 9.00 103/180


IARU-R1
• SSB: 1 minute periods.
• MGM: 30 seconds periods.
This practice gives quite satisfactory results. However developing technology make it possible to use
much different periods and amateurs may wish to arrange 1 minute periods for Telegraphy and shorter
periods for SSB and MGM especially during major showers. If non-recommended time periods are used
the first priority is to avoid causing interference to local stations that are using the recommended periods.
Even though the recommended period for SSB contacts is 1 minute periods a quick-break procedure
making a break every 10-15 seconds, in case the QSO can be completed within one long burst, are
encouraged during major meteor showers.

Transmit periods
In order to minimise the overall interference with other stations standard transmit periods are
recommended. Station in central and Western Europe should use second period. All MS operators living in
the same area should, as far as possible, agree to transmit simultaneously in order to avoid mutual
interference.

QSO duration
Every uninterrupted QSO period must be considered as a separate trial. This means that it is not
permissible to break off and then continue the contact at a later time.
Frequencies
Scheduled contacts
These contacts may be arranged on any frequency, taking into consideration the mode and band plan.
Scheduled contacts must not use known popular frequencies and the random MS frequencies. Special
care should be applied on the frequency selection to avoid interference when using reverse transmit
periods according to your location.

Random contacts
The frequency used for CQ calls for random contacts should be according to the IARU Region 1
bandplans.
QSY frequencies for MGM
To avoid -interference, which results from a large number of stations attempting to complete contacts on
the various MS calling frequencies, a QSY method is recommended. During the CQ the caller indicates on
which frequency he/she will listen for a reply and carry out any subsequent QSO. The procedure for
moving a beginning QSO off the calling frequency without losing contact is as follows. If an operator wants
to call CQ the following QSY procedure should be used:
• Select the frequency to be used for a QSO by checking whether it is clear of traffic and QRM.
• In the CQ call, immediately following the letters "CQ", kHz is inserted to indicate the frequency that
will be used for reception when the CQ call finishes.
• During the receiving period the receiver should be tuned to the frequency indicated by the letter
used in the CQ call.
• When the caller receives a signal on the receiving frequency indicated during the call and identifies
the reply as an answer on his CQ, the transmitter is moved to the same receiving frequency and
the whole QSO procedure takes place there.

If an operator instead of calling CQ wishes to listen for a CQ call the following QSY-procedure should be
used:
• Listen on a random contact frequency.
• When a CQ call is received, note the kHz-frequency, which follows the letters "CQ" in the call. From
this find the correct receiving frequency which the calling station will use for receiving replies.
• QSY the transmitter to the receiving frequency, and transmit a reply during the appropriate period.
The format for the reply can be found in section 8.
VHF Handbook 9.00 104/180
IARU-R1
• As the QSO will take place on this frequency, continue to transmit and to listen, during the
appropriate periods, on this frequency. It may be that the station calling CQ will not hear your first
reply, but may do so during one or more subsequent periods. Hence there is no need to return to
the calling frequency.

• The QSY frequencies should take place in the segment according to the IARU Region 1 bandplans.

• MGM, kHz-frequency
Users of MGM indicate the frequency they intend to carry out the QSO by adding the three digits of
the absolute frequency, i.e. the kHz-frequency. For example CQ383 indicates that the station will
listen on 144,383 MHz for a subsequent contact.

Example: G4ASR wishes to try a random MS experiment on MGM and wants to start with calling
CQ. He first checks his receiver in the MGM range of 144,360 MHz to 144,397 MHz and finds a
clear frequency on 144,394 MHz. He calls CQ on 144,370 MHz, and he must now add the kHz-
frequency to his CQ call to indicate on which frequency he intends to listen. In this example he will
therefore call "CQ394" in his CQ call.
Example: Your receive PA2DW who is calling "CQ274" on the 50 MHz random frequency. This
tells you that PA2DW will listen on exactly 50,274 MHz.

• CW/SSB
This proposal does not describe any procedures for QSY operation on CW/SSB anymore.

QSO procedure
All modes use the same MS-QSO procedure.
When attempting random SSB contacts, speak the letters clearly, using phonetics where appropriate.
• Calling
The contact starts with one station calling the other by sending both call signs.

• Reporting system
The report consists of two numbers:

First number Second number (signal strength)

burst duration S-units S/N


2 : up to 0,5 s 6 : below S2 or below 5 dB
3 : 0,5 - 1 s 7 : from S2 to S3 or from 5 dB to 10 dB
4:1-5s 8 : from S4 to S5 or from 10 dB to 15 dB
5 : longer than 5 s 9 : above S5 or above 15 dB
Note that the number "1" is not used as the first number/burst duration.

Maximum duration of a ping (Underdense Reflection):


Band Duration
50 MHz 1000 ms
70 MHz 500 ms
144 MHz 100 ms
432 MHz 13 ms
This means that the duration of bursts (Overdense Reflections) are longer than the above ping durations.

• Reporting procedure

VHF Handbook 9.00 105/180


IARU-R1
A report is sent when the operator has positive evidence of having received the correspondent's or his own
callsign or parts of one of them. The report should be sent twice between each set of call signs. The report
must not be changed during a contact even though signal strength or duration might well justify it.

• Confirmation procedure
• As soon as either operator copies both call signs and a report he may start sending a confirmation.
This means that all letters and figures have been correctly received.
The message can be pieced together from fragments received over several bursts and pings, but it
is up to the operator to ensure that it is done correctly and unambiguously. Confirmation is given by
inserting an R before the report.
• When one operator receives a confirmation message, such as "R27", and all required information is
complete he must confirm with a string of R's, inserting his own call sign after at least 3 R’s. When
the other operator has received the R's, the contact is complete and he may respond in the same
manner.

• Requirements for a complete QSO


Both operators must have copied both callsigns, the report and a confirmation that the other operator has
done the same. This confirmation can either be an "R" preceding the report or a string of minimum three
consecutive "RRR".
Valid contacts
A valid contact is one where both operators have copied both callsigns, the report and an unambiguous
confirmation. However no recourse should be made during the contact to obtain the required information,
change of frequency, antenna direction, etc. via other methods such as the Internet, DX Cluster, talk-back
on another band, telephone etc. Such secondary methods invalidate the meteor scatter contact.
In essence: if anything concerning the ongoing QSO attempt is agreed through other means than the QSO
attempt frequency a new start is required.

Additional information for communication before and during the MS QSO


Acceptable examples:
• “shall we make a sked on 144.388 starting at 1310z, I will start”)
• “I have QRM, let’s move 5 kHz up and start again”
• “let’s continue for another 15 minutes and start again”
• “thank you for a nice QSO” after the QSO has completed on the radio”

Unacceptable Examples:-
• “I only need the final rogers”
• “470/9”
• “I received a burst from you”
• “I received a burst from you but I cannot decode it”

VHF Handbook 9.00 106/180


IARU-R1
QSO Procedure for Airplane Reflections
Airplane Reflections is the process of reflecting radio waves off the body of an aircraft in flight. Contacts
may be made on any of the UHF or Microwaves bands with distances up to 800 kilometres or so away.
(The higher the frequency, the shorter the time you have). As the available time for a QSO in this
propagation mode is very brief, usually less than one minute, we need an operating procedure in order to
speed up the information exchange.
The scheme (not the reporting system) for the “old” MS procedure seems like a suitable model for this
purpose. This procedure is primarily for CW and SSB contacts but may be adapted for other
communication modes if required.
Calling
The contact starts with one station calling randomly (CQ), - or in a scheduled QSO: Calling the other
station by sending both call signs. A calling sequence should be kept as short as possible.
Reporting system
The report is the standard RS(T) reporting system: as example 59 or 599.
Reporting procedure
A report is sent when the operator has positive evidence of having received the correspondent's or his own
callsign or parts of them. The report should be sent at least twice between each set of call signs. The
report must not be changed during a contact even though signal strength or duration might well justify it.
Confirmation procedure
As soon as either operator copies both call signs and a report he may start sending a confirmation. This
means that all letters and figures have been correctly received. The message can be pieced together from
fragments, but it is up to the operator to ensure that it is done correctly and unambiguously. Confirmation is
given by inserting an R before the report. When one operator receives a confirmation message, such as
"R57", and all required information is complete he must confirm with a string of R's, inserting his own call
sign after at least 3 R’s. When the other operator has received the R's, the contact is complete and he may
respond in the same manner.
Requirements for a complete QSO
Both operators must have copied both callsigns, the report and a confirmation that the other operator has
done the same. This confirmation can either be an "R" preceding the report or a string of minimum three
consecutive "RRR".
And in practice:
If you start calling CQ:
CQ G4ASR …CQ G4ASR … CQ G4ASR … BREAK ( or K on CW)
Or starting a scheduled QSO:
SM7ECM G4ASR... BREAK ( or K on CW)
When signals are heard insert a conventional tropo report (usually 2 - 3 times)
SM7ECM G4ASR 52 52 52... BREAK (K)
Reply with a confirmation roger report (usually 2 - 3 times)
[G4ASR SM7ECM] R57 R57 R57 ... BREAK (K)
Confirm with a string of rogers (usually 3 times)
[SM7ECM G4ASR] Roger Roger Roger...BREAK (K)
[G4ASR SM7ECM] Roger Roger Roger...BREAK (K)

Usually QSOs made via Airplane reflections is conducted on random frequencies. As a consequence the
callsigns could be eliminated when first copied correctly. For contest purposes you have to add the contest
exchange i.e. the Locator.

VHF Handbook 9.00 107/180


IARU-R1
Rapid Deployment Amateur Radio (RaDAR)

Introduction
Rapid Deployment Amateur Radio, often referred to by its acronym RaDAR, is a concept for operating an
amateur radio station anywhere, anytime and even in adverse environmental conditions. This concept
supports the amateur radio service’s emergency communications mandate.

The concept
Rapid deployment and indeed rapid redeployment is what makes RaDAR different otherwise it would be
just the same as all the others nothing different to what has been done for a 100 years.

RaDAR has evolved into something where movements are the highlight. It is therefore more than just
making QSOs, it’s a challenge to decide quickly where and how to set up an effective station, proving it
works by making 5 contacts; packing up making sure nothing is left behind, moving and doing it all over
again.

It’s a different challenge including repeated physical activity. It's also a method of learning, practising and
finding what works and what does not.

Modes of communication
RaDAR promotes the use of voice, digital, CW, HF, point to point VHF and UHF communications and even
satellite communications. The use of terrestrial repeaters is however not allowed, for contest purposes at
least.

Summary
Many looking to practice amateur radio in different ways will see its value and the extreme fun it can be.
The highlight is the “moving” aspect of RaDAR which is what makes RaDAR different to all other amateur
radio activities.

A link will be made on the IARU R1 website to give more information about RaDAR.

VHF Handbook 9.00 108/180


IARU-R1

Operating practice for digital modes


Guidelines for Packet Radio Operators
• Amateur Radio takes pride in being self-regulated. Packet Radio Operators should continue this
tradition.
• Packet Radio Operators, like all Amateur Radio Operators, should observe published Band Plans.
• A Packet Radio Operator should not send the following traffic either direct or via mail boxes:
• All advertising for selling, buying or trading goods, including amateur equipment (except if permitted
by local regulations).
• All statements and/or propaganda on political or religious subjects.
• All inappropriate language, as, for instance, the use of swear words, obscenities, defamatory or
libellous language etc.
• All material which may infringe copyright.
• All material which infringes privacy, whether personal or corporate.
• A Packet Radio Operator utilising a BBS should avoid transmitting unnecessary or redundant
messages and documents in order to enhance network efficiency.
• A Packet Radio Operator utilising a BBS should ensure that the callsign of the originating station,
including the name of the person responsible in the case of a club station, is clearly shown on
every message so that the sender can be identified.
• A Packet Radio Operator should avoid messages that are too long for efficient relay through the
network.
• A Packet Radio Operator utilising a BBS should ensure that all messages transmitted are
addressed to the appropriate group of recipients and not addressed to inappropriate areas in order
to ensure network efficiency.

Guidelines for Packet Radio Bulletin Board Operators


• The Operator of a Packet Radio Bulletin Board is obliged to provide a reliable service, within a
defined area for a defined purpose.
• A Packet Radio Bulletin Board Operator is morally responsible for all messages forwarded by his
system. He should make his best efforts to ensure that the traffic forwarded is appropriate to the
Amateur Services and in accordance with the Guidelines for Packet Radio Operators.
• HF Mail Boxes should only be used where there is a genuine need that cannot be provided by VHF
and other means.
• A Packet Radio Bulletin Board Operator may take action to exclude a User who persistently
contravenes the Guidelines for Packet Radio Operators. Exclusion of a User should be done as a
last resort after the User has been warned and where exclusion does not contravene local
regulations.

Guidelines for APRS

Based on Cavtat 2008 recommendation CT08_C5_Rec13, IARU Region-1 is to adopt the APRS
“New n-N Paradigm”, as published by WB4APR

By simplifying the network to only accept “WIDEn-N”, and telling users to limit their “N's” to the minimum
needed for their own area, a vast improvement in reliability and throughput will be achieved in a common
IARU, Region 1 APRS System, and beyond.
ON6TI is to draw up a form of words that will detail this further in a future edition of the VHF Managers’
Handbook

VHF Handbook 9.00 109/180


IARU-R1
AMATEUR SATELLITTES
Introduction
The Amateur Satellite Service is a radiocommunications service using spaceborne radio equipment for the
same purposes as the Amateur Service. This includes amateur communications by earth orbiting satellites,
interplanetary missions and contacts with astronauts on the International Space Station.

Starting with the launch of Oscar-1 in 1961, amateur satellites have become increasingly sophisticated.
They have provided voice and data links, served school science groups, provided emergency
communications, acted as technology demonstrators, and transmitted Earth images. Construction and
operation of any amateur satellite is subject to a range of ITU, IARU and other regulatory and coordination
procedures.

IARU Region 1 and IARU Satellite Coordination


General
Satellite builders should make certain that their operating frequencies are coordinated to ensure that
mutual interference between different spacecraft does not occur. More information about this process can
be found here: http://www.iaru.org/satellite/

National VHF/Microwave Managers and Amsat organisations are encouraged to closely coordinate
activities and monitor developments in their countries so that, for example, Cubesat projects are fully
coordinated. Advice is available from IARU Satellite Advisors and Coordinators.

Satellites transmitting on Amateur bands with undocumented protocols or without


permission
There is an ever-increasing number of small satellites being launched these days. Many of these resort to
the Amateur satellite service as an inexpensive way of obtaining spectrum access. This is currently
generating two problems: some of these satellites have not obtained IARU frequency coordination or other
necessary permits but still transmit on the Amateur bands, others obtain IARU coordination but do not
publish the specifications of the protocols they use, so Amateurs all over the world cannot decode the
satellite signal.

The interim meeting in Vienna propose the formation of a working group within IARU R1 to decide
what changes to the IARU frequency coordination process would guarantee that interested Amateurs have
enough technical information to make a decoder software.
Since the problems addressed in this proposal are not specific to IARU R1, but rather affect the worldwide
Amateur collective, another task of this working group will be to coordinate with the other IARU regions, so
that this matter can be treated in a global basis and a joint effort can be made.
Finally, one other task of the working group should be to inform universities through their national societies
of the concerns and rules for Amateur bands use and to organize a prospective survey of potential satellite
projects to help spread the information.

Note from EC: The proposal addresses small satellites operating in bands allocated to the amateur
satellite service without IARU coordination and encrypted downlink signals in violation of article 25
of the ITU Radio Regulations. This item will be addressed by the IARU Satellite Advisor and the
IARU Satellite Frequency Coordination Panel

VHF Handbook 9.00 110/180


IARU-R1
Amateur Satellite Names
Amateur Satellites are currently named within two generic groups, one is OSCAR which is an acronym for
Orbiting Satellite Carrying Amateur Radio and the other is RS which is an acronym for Radio Sport, the
description used for Amateur Radio in the former Soviet Union.

A nomenclature has been developed that includes a reference to either the group that built the satellite or
a name that the builders would like assigned to their satellite e.g. UoSAT-OSCAR -22 that was built by the
University of Surrey and Fuji-OSCAR -20 which was built in Japan. For simplicity most Amateur Satellite
names are abbreviated to XX-yy e.g. UoSAT-OSCAR-22 is known as UO-22 and Fuji-OSCAR-20 is known
as FO-20. Most of the Russian-built Amateur Satellites are simply known as RS-yy.

The OSCAR designation is administered by Amsat-NA not IARU. There is no requirement for an OSCAR
number to be assigned to an amateur satellite in order for it to be legitimately recognised and used in the
amateur satellite service. However OSCAR numbers are a proud tradition of amateur radio that should be
supported and continued.

Amateur-satellite operating practice


(Adopted at the IARU Region I Conference in Warsaw, 1975)

Region I member societies accept the instructions published by the sponsors of amateur -satellites like e.g.
AMSAT as regards the times for operation, output powers that may be employed and the way of operating
through the amateur-satellite, including adherence to the published satellite bandplan.

All possible publicity should be given to satellite bandplans, operating schedules, power limitations on
ground stations etc., together with advice on the necessity of receiver improvement via low-noise
pre-amplifiers and, where applicable, low-angle antennas, in order to enable operators to monitor their own
and other downlink transmissions satisfactorily, thus ensuring that:
• no transmission is started on a frequency already in use
• interference due to doppler effect frequency shift is avoided
• blocking caused by own transmissions can be identified and output power can be reduced
• other stations calling can be heard and identified.

Amateur-satellite users should be encouraged to:


• refrain from transmitting unless they can monitor their own signals
• strictly adhere to the satellite bandplan with their modes of transmission
• avoid long calls and slow operation
• refrain from operating during times reserved for specific purposes like scientific experiments, as
published by the satellite sponsors.

National societies should supervise the implementation of the above recommendations, and take
appropriate action against persistent offenders.

The above recommendations were re-confirmed and strengthened at the IARU Region I Conference in
Miskolc-Tapolca (1978), where the following resolution was adopted:

Publicity, preferably on an annual basis, should be given to the correct ethics and practices for
satellite operation. National societies should investigate the possibility of setting up monitoring
stations for the amateur-satellite service, in order to be able to take direct action against operators
who do not observe the internationally agreed operating rules. It is recommended that national
societies

VHF Handbook 9.00 111/180


IARU-R1
• Write to offending amateurs in their own country (society members as well as non-society members
pointing out the correct behaviour and operating practice expected from them;
• report directly to other member societies any infringements of the established rules occurring in
their country.

At the IARU Region 1 Conference in Tel Aviv 1996 it was decided that for a trial period the IARU Region 1
Monitoring System coordinator should not limit his activities to the bands below 30 MHz but take care as
well, together with the national monitoring system coordinators and national satellite coordinators, of
intruders in the input channels of satellite transponders. This activity might be rather complex as even the
145 MHz band is not exclusively for amateurs in some countries and the other satellite allocations have a
secondary status in most countries.
But the VHF Managers shall pay a lot of attention to this activity as the growing problem of intruders in
satellite inputs is becoming a serious nuisance.

Amateur Satellite Band Plan Usage


In IARU Region 1 band plans the following frequency segments are designated for use by satellites:-
• 145.800 - 146.000 MHz (out of the overall 144-146MHz ITU allocation)
• 435.000 - 438.000 MHz
• 1260 - 1270 MHz (uplink only)
• 2400 - 2450 MHz
• 3400 - 3410 MHz (only available in a few Region 1 countries)
• 5650 - 5670 MHz (uplink only)
• 5830 - 5850 MHz (downlink only)
• 10.450 - 10.500 GHz
• 24.000 - 24.050 GHz
• 47.000 - 47.200 GHz
• 76.000 - 81.000 GHz
• 134.00 - 136.00 GHz
• 136.00 - 141.00 GHz
• 241.000 - 248.00 GHz
• 248.000 - 250.00 GHz

VHF Handbook 9.00 112/180


IARU-R1
Satellite Transponder Designations
Apart from beacons and telemetry transmissions, amateur satellites often carry transponders. There are
two methods of designating operation modes and frequencies. The original method specified by
operational mode type was as per the table below:-

MODE Uplink between Downlink between


A 145.8 - 146.0 MHz 29.3 - 29.5 MHz
B 435 – 438 MHz 145.8 - 146.0 MHz
J 145.8 - 146.0 MHz 435 - 438 MHz
K 21.26 - 21.30 MHz 29.40 - 29.50 MHz
L 1260 - 1270 MHz 435 - 438 MHz
S 435 - 438 MHz 2400 - 2450 MHz
T 21.26 - 21.30 MHz 145.8 - 146.0 MHz

More recently a more flexible alternative method has been developed where the input (uplink) is always
specified first. A slash is used to separate input and output:-.

Band Wavelength Designator


21MHz 15m H
29MHz 10m T
144MHz 2m V
435MHz 70cm U
1260MHz 24cm L
2400MHz 13cm S
5650MHz 6cm C
10GHz 3cm X
24GHz 1.5cm K

When this newer method is used for transponder modes, the older designations become:-

Old Name New Name


A V/T
B U/V
J V/U
K H/T
KA H,V/T
KT H/T,V
L L/U
S U/S
T H/V

VHF Handbook 9.00 113/180


IARU-R1

Amateur Satellite Organisations


For up to date information visit:
http://www.amsat.org/amsat-new/links/index.php
http://www.amsat.org/amsat-new/satellites/

Current Satellites
For current operational information check these sites:
http://www.amsat.org/amsat-new/satellites/status.php
http://www.dk3wn.info/satellites.shtml
http://oscar.dcarr.org/

The list is also posted on the RSGB web site at http://data.dcc.rsgb.org

VHF Handbook 9.00 114/180


IARU-R1
SIGNAL REPORTING SYSTEM
Signal reporting ( Recommendation R.1; R.2)
Although from the beginning of amateur radio signal reports have been essential, no formal standard for
the reports exists. But the "Readability, Strength, Tone" system with R,S and T values between 1 and 9 is
in widespread use. Several handbooks gave and give in words indications how the values are to be
understood.

The readability and tone reports are in principle "subjective" but the strength report can be objective as a
simple measurement of the received signal in voltage or power is possible. Such reports are in particular at
the VHF and higher frequencies useful for more precise evaluation of propagation, antenna properties and
receiver sensitivities.

At the IARU Region 1 Conference in Hungary 1978 the need for a harmonised standard for the "S-meter
scale" was expressed and a proposal was accepted for publication in society journals. The essential
recommendation was 1 S-point is 6 dB. At the Brighton Conference in 1981 the recommendation was
formally adopted as a standard for amateur radio equipment manufacturers.

At the 1990 Torremolinos conference an amendment was adopted which reconfirmed the -93 dBm
reference level for frequencies above 144 MHz, but no statement was issued for the bands between 30
and 144 MHz.

Although not explicitly stated the implication of the recommendation is that on VHF and higher frequencies
the S-meter will deviate on the thermal noise only ( S2 in 3 kHz bandwidth, S3 in 12 kHz bandwidth).
Although the recommendation is not too complex it seems to be rather difficult to implement by commercial
manufacturers.

Another matter is the ‘tone’ report. This is a subjective measure. It was important in the ‘old days’ when
rather primitive oscillators were used in the TX. Modern transmitters, even on the millimeter bands, have in
most cases a very good oscillator, resulting in a ‘pure tone’ and a T9 report is generally given.

On VHF and higher, however, the characteristics of the propagation medium can significantly ‘modulate’
the signal (doppler shift, spreading) and a T9 report is not possible. Definitions of tone reports below 9 are
rather vague. At the Region 1 conference 1999 in Lillehammer a recommendation (R.2) has been
accepted to use special letters for signal tone reports when the influence of the propagation is detectable.
Such reports can support propagation studies.

IARU Region 1 Technical Recommendation S-METER READINGS


BRIGHTON 1981, TORREMOLINOS 1990

Standardisation of S-meter readings


• One S-unit corresponds to a signal level difference of 6 dB,
• On the bands below 30 MHz a meter deviation of S-9 corresponds to an available power of -73
dBm from a continuous wave signal generator connected to the receiver input terminals,
• On the bands above 30 MHz this available power shall be -93 dBm,
• The metering system shall be based on quasi-peak detection with an attack time of 10 msec ∀ 2
msec and a decay time constant of at least 500 msec.

VHF Handbook 9.00 115/180


IARU-R1
IARU Region 1 Technical Recommendation TONE REPORTS
Vienna 2010

Tone reports
In order to give an indication of distorted tonal quality due to special propagation modes, the 1-9 scale of
the Tonality (T) component of the RST reporting system will be extended with the following:
• "a" For signals distorted by auroral propagation
• "s" For signals distorted by scatter propagation mechanisms
• "m" for signals distorted by multipath propagation.

For example:-
• 599 - Good signal
• 58a - Fairly good Signal via Aurora
• 59s - Good signal via Scatter (e.g. Rainscatter)

Footnotes
• Other letters may be defined in future should the need arise
• This alternative system may be used for any mode e.g. CW, SSB, MGM etc

The RSQ (Readability Strength Quality) reporting scale for digital


modes:
Where applicable RSQ reporting may be used for digital modes

Readability (% of text)
• R5 95%+ Perfectly readable
• R4 80% Practically no difficulty, occasional missed characters
• R3 40% Considerable difficulty, many missed characters
• R2 20% Occasional words distinguishable
• R1 0% Undecipherable

Strength
• S9 Very strong trace
• S7 Strong trace
• S5 Moderate trace
• S3 Weak trace
• S1 Barely perceptible trace

Quality
• Q9 Clean signal, no visible sidebar pairs
• Q7 One barely visible pair
• Q5 One easily visible pair
• Q3 Multiple visible pairs
• Q1 Splatter over much of the spectrum

VHF Handbook 9.00 116/180


IARU-R1
The MOS (Mean Opinion Score) reporting scale for digitized speech:

MOS Quality Impairment


5 Excellent Imperceptible
4 Good Perceptible, but not annoying
3 Fair Slightly annoying
2 Poor Annoying
1 Bad Very annoying
0 Unusable Total

Notes:

Non-integer MOS scores like 3.5 are possible. An MOS of 3.0 is generally referred to as toll quality,
meaning good enough to pay for. Digital voice users may tolerate MOS levels less than three if they get
additional benefits, such as simultaneous voice and data services.

While evaluation of voice systems may be made based on test-bench measurements, they must ultimately
relate to the perception of the listener. A large body of voice-system evaluations exists based on MOS.
Comparisons among systems are therefore readily made. MOS relates well to the readability figures
commonly used in Amateur Radio signal reports.

VHF Handbook 9.00 117/180


IARU-R1
THE LOCATOR SYSTEM
Landshut 2017

Background
The IARU Locator system was defined in 1980 as a World-wide system for radio amateurs to quote their
location with sufficient accuracy for practical purposes using a simple alphanumeric scheme related to
latitude and longitude The initial specification called for a 6-charac-ter code which could define a station’s
location to a squaroid(4) of approximately 4,6 km each side at mid latitudes. The resulting positional
accuracy was therefore around 3 km. This was deemed adequate for VHF contest scoring purposes. For
lower resolution, for example at HF, a larger squaroid using just four characters would suffice. Even with
six digits, it can prove to be inadequate for microwave usage and thus extensions have come into use.

Updating the Definition of the IARU locator


The widespread use of GPS and the resulting high accuracy possible in specifying any person’s location
on the Earth has led to a multiplicity of software and applications for radio amateurs such as path profile
plots, terrain mapping as well as applications such as Google maps. The IARU locator is a natural
contender as a means of specifying any station’s position in a format that is much neater and simpler than
quoting a latitude / longitude. However, to use the loca-tor in this way means its resolution has to be
extended. It is thus opportune to formally clarify that extension and other inconsistencies that have arisen.

Definition of the original IARU locator


Latitude of any station is measured within a range of -90 to +90 degrees, with -90° being the South Pole
and +90° being the North Pole. Longitude is defined from -180° to +180° with zero degrees being the
Greenwich meridian.

The Locator first divides the latitude/longitude into large ‘squaroids’ of 10 degrees of latitude and 20
degrees of longitude. There are 18 of these subdivisions for lat and long; each are allocated a letter of the
alphabet from A to R.

The first letter of the Locator corresponds to the 20-degree longitude squaroid starting from the antipodal
line of +/-180 degrees and counting round the world in units of 20°. Therefore 20 degrees WEST of
Greenwich would be the ninth division and gets the letter ‘I’
The second character of the locator defines the large squaroid of latitude, counting up from the South Pole
up to the North Pole. A latitude of 50 degrees North therefore corresponds to 14 up from the pole and
equates to the letter ‘0’

Each 20 x 10 degree squaroid is then subdivided into 10, measured conventionally from left to right for
longitude and bottom to top for latitude. The pair of numbers from 0 to 9 corresponding to this division are
appended to the locator as characters 3 and 4 for long / lat respectively. For example, the squaroid whose
lower left corner lies at 2° West and 50° North becomes IO90. This four-character format is the lowest
resolution used in practice and at mid latitudes gives a positional accuracy of very roughly 80 km, which is
usually sufficient for most HF use.

4 The term ‘Squaroid’ has been used throughout this document in place of the incor-rectly used locator ‘square.’ The
small subdivisions of lat/long are three-dimensional projections on a spheroid and are neither square, nor have their
sides straight, nor at right angles. On a Mercator map projection, they may appear rectangular, and at 60 degrees’
latitude, may even appear square but this is only an artefact of the projec-tion in use. The term ‘squaroid’ removes
this ambiguity
VHF Handbook 9.00 118/180
IARU-R1
For VHF and up these large squaroids are subdivided into 24 x 24 “sub-squares”, with dimensions 5 x 2.5
minutes of arc for longitude/latitude respectively. Again, counting left to right and bottom to top, they are
allocated the letters A to X. For example, IO90IV therefore corresponds to the squaroid whose lower left
corner sits at 1 degree 20 minutes West and 50 degrees 52.5 minutes North. This six character format
represents a positional accuracy of around 3 km at mid latitudes(5)

The original 1980 definition also allowed for a further subdivision into 10 “small squares” of 0.5’ x 0.25’ for
roughly 300 metres positioning accuracy. These appear as another pair of numbers, for example
IO90IV58. Eight digit locators started to be used amongst some microwave operators in the 1990s for dish
bearing calculations where the normal six-digit format was not accurate enough. It also allowed more
accurate distance calculations on short microwave paths. Eight characters can also be useful for defining
the location of microwave propagation beacons.

Problems with the Existing Scheme


The six or eight-character version only allows positions to be quoted to about 3 km or 300 metres
respectively. This can often be insufficient for terrain or path plotting software to work with.
When deriving an (approximate) latitude and longitude from a quoted locator we need a reference point
within the squaroid to calculate from. This was originally defined as being the middle of the square.

Unfortunately, not everyone has adopted this definition; some software is believed to use the lower left
corner. In addition, where locators are quoted to different resolutions, 4, 6 or 8 characters; which ‘middle’
should be used?

Previous to the introduction of the IARU locator, the old QRA used a scheme where its last letter was
traditionally spelt in lower case, eg ZM41f. Despite the definition in the VHF Hand-book specifying capital
letters, this has carried over into common usage with the ‘new’ six-digit locator. So, people often write
IO90iv instead of the original intended IO90IV. The use of lower case for characters 5 and 6 then extended
into many popular software packages.
It is also opportune to clarify how the system converges to a single point at the North and South Poles.

New Higher Resolutions


The advent of very high accuracy positioning using GPS and high resolution mapping such as Google
Maps has led to an expansion of the use of the Locator scheme. But such expansion has not always been
implemented in a coordinated manner.

The majority of schemes in use subdivide the 8 character squaroid into 24 further ‘micro-squares’ each of
0,5/24 and 0,25/24 minutes of arc (1,25 x 0,625 seconds of arc) and append these as another pair of
letters, A-X, to make a 10-digit locator; for example, IO90IV58AH. The resulting accuracy of a position so-
defined is now about 13 metres.

Several manufacturers of GPS handhelds have used IARU locator as a display option. Several software
packages, many interfacing to Google maps, also adopt the 10 character locators. All software packages
that have been verified so far use the sub-divisions described above.

However, at least one manufacturer of GPS receivers that have IARU locator as a display op-tion has used
a 25 x 25 division with letters A-Y for the final pair (possibly to gain a squaroid of 0,02 x 0,01 minutes of
arc). Some have also added a yet another pair of numbers, for 1 metre accuracy.

5 The system converges to a point at the geographic poles. The origin at the South pole is therefore AA00AA00AA.
The squaroids at the North and South Poles locations are of zero “width” as the longitude lines have all converged
there
VHF Handbook 9.00 119/180
IARU-R1
Mapping and Accuracy
At one time, every country had its own mapping of latitude/longitude due to adopting a localised spheroid
model of the Earth’s shape. For example, the mainland UK adopted the GBR36 spheroid. This typically
leads to errors of a few hundreds of metres when compared with a lat/long mapping extended from
another country. The few-kilometres accuracy of the original six-character locator meant that whatever
local mapping was in use, any such error would go unnoticed.

However, the GPS system needs a uniform mapping so the world-wide WGS84 standard has now been
adopted as an international standard. To make use of higher resolution locators on a world-wide basis, a
similar universal spheroid has to be used for all stations.

Proposals to Clarify and Standardise the IARU Locator, including


higher Accuracy positioning
• The definition of the existing 8-character scheme should be extended by adding a further division
into 24 lettered squares to give a 10-character locator allowing a po-sitioning accuracy of around 13
metres. Even higher resolution use for future appli-cations should be defined by successively sub-
dividing in the same way; alternating 10 and 24 subdivisions using numbers and letter pairs.
• When the locator is specified at lower resolutions, e.g. 6 characters such as in VHF contests, the
centre of the squaroid at that resolution should be taken. This is equiv-alent to, for example,
appending the 6-digit location IO90IV with the mid-range char-acters 44LL to give IO90IV44LL for
the purposes of calculation. A quoted locator of IO90IV58 would have “LL” appended for the
calculation.
• That the WGS84 worldwide spheroid be the standard mapping be used for all locator conversions.
• IARU Locators should always be quoted and used employing all Upper Case (Capital) letters.

VHF Handbook 9.00 120/180


IARU-R1
ANTENNA POLARISATION ( RECOMMENDATION P.1.)
At several conferences the antenna polarisation has been discussed. Interestingly enough the use of
horizontal polarisation, almost exclusively used for non-channelised amateur traffic on VHF and higher
frequencies has never been formally recommended. Part of recommendation FM.2. recommends vertical
polarisation for FM repeaters.

At the Lausanne conference in 1953 (this is really the oldest technical recommendation of Region 1 ) the
helical antenna thread direction was laid down. Why that was done at the time is unclear, but 30 years
later (Cefalu 1984 ) the EME community felt a need for the definition of circular polarisation for EME
contacts. 12 years later, however, it was recommended to use for EME above 3 GHz linear polarisation for
the time being.

As using circular polarisation appears to have advantages for repeater stations the matter may come up
again at future conferences.

IARU-R1 1 Technical Recommendation (Signal Polarisation)


LAUSANNE1953, CEFALU 1984,TEL AVIV 1996

Standards for signal polarisation


• Helical aerials
Looking into the direction of transmission, helical beam aerials shall have a right-hand thread.
• Moonbounce aerials
The polarisation of microwave signals used for communication via moonbounce shall be right-hand
circular, i.e. the wave travelling away from the observer should rotate in a clockwise direction for
operation below 3 GHz.
For operation above 3 GHz linear polarisation shall be used. European stations should use vertical
polarisation. All stations shall include provision for adjustable polarisation and be prepared to agree
the offset beforehand. Exact polarisation offsets shall be checked at the commencement of activity.
Should technical developments occur to make circular polarisation practical for general adoption
this will be considered at a future conference.
• FM Repeater aerials
Vertical ( see recommendation FM.2.)

VHF Handbook 9.00 121/180


IARU-R1

DEFINITION FOR PING AND BURST FOR SCIENTIFIC


ANALYSIS OF AMATEUR RADIO METEOR SCATTER
For the analysis of scientific data the old way of defining a ping and a burst, which depended on
information / no information, is not relevant.

Definitions
• Ping: Reflection from an underdense meteor trail.
• Burst: Reflection from an overdense meteor trail.

Background:
Radio Amateurs have used the term "ping" to describe a ‘short’ reflection. Most of the European operators
define "ping" as a reflection too short to pass information. This definition was most likely evolved in the
1970's, when high speed CW (then < 600 LPM) gained popularity in Europe. With the less efficient
equipment used those days, the shorter reflections were either too short to pass full characters due to slow
speed and/or too weak to decode with the equipment available at that time.

Some operators define "ping" as a reflection from an underdense meteor trail and "burst" as a reflection
from an overdense trail. This is also how ‘ping’ and ‘burst’ are described in The VHF/UHF DX Book
(published by RSGB). Generally it can be said that most good reflections come from overdense trails and
short/less usable reflections (pings) from underdense trails. Overdense and underdense reflections can be
roughly separated by duration of the reflection (reference 1).

The principal difference of underdense and overdense trail is the mechanism that re-emits RF-energy. On
underdense trails the RF-energy penetrates the trail and makes electrons oscillate and re-radiate energy,
while on overdense trails, no penetration occurs and the trail is modelled as a metallic cylinder reflecting
RF-energy. When receiving meteor reflections the audible differences are found in signal strength, duration
and decaying shape.

CW speeds used in MS have increased since 1970's by about four times and new digital equipment (i.e.
DTR) make copying useful information from a weak reflection now much more easier. The old way of
defining a ping has thus become invalid and does have serious lack of logic by definition, while the
underdense/overdense division is based on well-known and studied physical facts, as described in
scientific literature.

It would also be extremely useful, if MS working results published i.e. in DUBUS were of scientific use.
Such working results could be used by people like OH5IY, who are doing scientific research on meteor
scatter. QSO information in DUBUS contains the number of pings and bursts of every contact. This
information is of little use, however, if ping is understood as a reflection with no information, thus
depending on speed used. Instead, if ping is defined as an underdense reflection this kind of information
would be of great value. The relative number of underdense and overdense reflections could be compared
between different showers and between consecutive hours in the same shower. This would provide us
new knowledge of meteor showers and sporadic meteors.

VHF Handbook 9.00 122/180


IARU-R1
Aid for defining underdense and overdense trails

Underdense and overdense reflections can be roughly separated by duration of the reflection (which varies
by frequency). The threshold is not sharp, but a simple approximation can be made. On 50 MHz
overdense trail durations are typically greater than 0.5 s (reference 1) and maximum underdense trail
durations approximately 0.5-1 s (reference 2).

In the following table a 1 s reflection on 50 MHz has been taken as upper limit for the underdense trails.
3)
Durations for other frequencies have been derived from it according to the following formula (reference
Where t = duration in seconds,
f = frequency in MHz

Maximum duration of an underdense reflection (ping):

Frequency Duration CW speed Number of letters received


50 MHz 1s 100 LPM 2
1000 LPM 17
2000 LPM 33
70 MHz 0.5 s 100 LPM 1
1000 LPM 8
2000 LPM 17
145 MHz 0.1 s 100 LPM 0
1000 LPM 2
2000 LPM 4
435 MHz 0.013 s 100 LPM 0
1000 LPM 0
2000 LPM 0

This table corresponds well with the situation as presently encountered on the popular 144 MHz band. For
example, a reflection on 145 MHz with the speed of 1000 LPM containing up to two letters when decoded
would be a ping. On the 435 MHz band pings are so short in duration (less than 0.013s) as to be almost
impossible to detect.

References:

1. The evolution of meteor burst communications system, P.S. Cannon & A.P.C Reed,
Journal of the Institution of Electronic and Radio Engineers, Vol. 57. No.
3, pp 101-112, May/June 1987.

2. J.A.Weitzen & al., An Estimate of the Capacity of the Meteor Burst Channel,
IEEE Transactions on Communications, Vol.Com-32, No.8. August 1984.

3. W.T. Ralston & al. Distribution of underdense meteor trail durations and
duty cycle and applications to meteor scatter communication system design.
Radio Science, Volume 28, Number 5, pp 747-757, September-October 1993

VHF Handbook 9.00 123/180


IARU-R1

FREQUENCY MODULATED TELEPHONY


The basic FM standard (Recommendation FM.1.)
One of the longest standing IARU Region 1 technical recommendations, adopted at the Region 1
Conference in Brussels (1969) deals with the basic parameters of Narrow Band FM (NBFM) Telephony. It
states "For FM within Region 1 a maximum modulation index of 1 and an audio band restricted to 3
kHz shall be used"

Between 1963 and 1969 the gradual introduction of VFO controlled SSB, replacing AM(x-tal controlled),
was taking place on VHF. At the same time, however, the problems with LF break-through in radio, TV and
audio equipment became embarrassing. Using FM and PM appeared to be the right solution in this case.
Of course the recently acquired habit of VFO control and co-channel working was used with FM as well.

In order for an efficient use of FM it appeared necessary to agree upon a few basic parameters which
would determine the optimum filter to be used in the receiver. A 12 kHz receiver bandwidth was finally
chosen. This appeared to be the minimum value giving distinctly better quality than 6 kHz AM without
showing too much of a threshold effect (at least not much more than conventional AM). Soon after the
recommendation had been adopted several manufacturers of crystal-filters marketed 12 kHz wide filters.

Almost 30 years later this basic recommendation still is in force, although VFO controlled FM has almost
disappeared (it still is used with rain-scatter on microwaves) and the majority of amateurs use crystal-
controlled FM transceivers with filters wider than 12 kHz, thus loosing several dB's in communications
efficiency.

It must be noted that the application of the recommendation is not limited to frequencies above
30 MHz. It equally well applies to the 29 MHz band, although it appears that FM on that band is often
received with filters narrower than 12 kHz.

Three years later, at the 1972 Scheveningen conference, a more detailed standard, largely based upon the
first was adapted, but this time VFO control appeared to be out of fashion and the standard dealt with
"Fixed channel FM stations". The audio response was specified more in detail as
300-3000 Hz with a 12 dB/octave fall off outside this band and 6 dB/octave pre-emphasis.

It appears sensible to combine those two recommendations into a single one at a future conference.

IARU Region 1 Technical Recommendation FM.1


BRUSSELS 1969, SCHEVENINGEN 1972

• TECHNICAL STANDARD FOR NARROW BAND FM (NBFM)


1. For FM within Region 1 a Maximum Modulation Index of 1 and an audio band restricted to 3
kHz shall be used.

• TECHNICAL STANDARDS FOR FIXED CHANNEL FM STATIONS


1. Traffic mode: Simplex on one channel.
2. Maximum Deviation: ∀ 3 kHz, 12K0F3E.
3. AF response: 300 - 3000 Hz, outside this band down with 12 dB/octave.
4. Pre-emphasis: +6 dB/octave in the transmitter.
5. De-emphasis: -6 dB/octave in the receiver.

VHF Handbook 9.00 124/180


IARU-R1

FM Repeaters ( Recommendation FM.2.)


At the 1972 Conference in Scheveningen a recommendation was worded for the then appearing FM
repeaters. Initially the recommendation only was meant for the 145 MHz band, but later the 435 MHz band
was added. The recommendation -of course- was based upon the standing recommendation for the audio
channel parameters ( FM.1.). But in addition the antenna polarisation was recommended as being vertical
which was a logical choice for a system meant to be used by mobile stations. Note that, although
no recommendation on antenna polarisation existed at the time, consensus existed on the use of
horizontal polarisation for all VHF and UHF activities and that still is the case for all non-channelised
activities on VHF/UHF.

In order to make the planning of repeaters using the same channel easier a maximum ERP of 15 Watts
was recommended. As, however, the antenna height above the surroundings was not specified this ERP
limit is not sufficient for the planning, but no additions have been made to this recommendation.
The major flaw of the recommendation is the lack of any explicit specification of the receiver bandwidth.
Had the receiver parameters been defined compatible with the transmitter definition (some people think
this is implicit) some difficulties in a few countries with the introduction of a 12.5 kHz channel spacing
system would never have been arisen.

IARU Region 1 Technical Recommendation FM.24


Technical standards for FM repeaters in the 145 MHz and 435 MHz bands

• Polarisation: Antennas in the repeater service shall have vertical polarisation.


• Operation: Repeaters should use either CTCSS or 1 750 Hz tone burst for access in order to prevent
unwanted operation caused by interference or other signals. CTCSS is preferred for new FM
repeaters - see below. DTMF can be optionally used to control repeater functions as per below. When
the signal to be relayed has disappeared or the operating time has come to an end the repeater
station shall send its own call, and 15 seconds thereafter the transmission shall be interrupted. It
should not be possible to interrupt the automatic identification transmission by a selective call. For
the station identification F2A modulation shall be used.
When working through a repeater station the lowest usable power consistent with good
communication is recommended.
• Power: The effective radiated power of the repeater transmitter shall not exceed 15 Watts.
• Traffic mode: Simplex using demodulation/remodulation on a single channel / frequency pair.
• Deviation: The maximum deviation of the repeater transmitter shall be ∀ 3 kHz ( 12K0F3E).
• A.F. response: Audio frequency response shall be 300 - 3000 Hz. Outside this band the response
shall go down with 12 dB/octave.
• Pre-emphasis: The transmitter pre-emphasis shall be +6 dB/octave.
• De-emphasis: The receiver de-emphasis shall be -6 dB/octave.
• Responsibility: The repeater shall be under the control of the national IARU member society or their
agent. The member society shall be responsible for the allocation of the adopted channel
frequencies.
• CTCSS: The use of CTCSS is strongly encouraged for VHF and UHF FM repeaters in Region 1, with
the aim of reducing inadvertent interference by users to repeaters sharing the same input channel.
In order to minimise mutual unwanted interference, from 1 Jan 2015 all new FM repeaters should
use CTCSS tones on receivers as well as on transmitters.

VHF Handbook 9.00 125/180


IARU-R1
For CTCSS the frequencies listed in table FM2.1 shall be adopted as a standard so that
compatibility between repeater systems in different countries can be maintained, aiding the traveller
who moves between countries.(The frequencies shall be accurate ∀ 1%)
• DTMF: The DTMF system as specified below can be used as an alternative to the control of
repeaters, voice mail boxes etc.
o The hardware part of the DTMF system consists of a keyboard with 12 push-buttons using
the symbols #,*,A,B,C,D and figures from 0 to 9. When pressed each push-button will
activate 2 tones simultaneously, one above, the other below 1000 Hz, according to the
following scheme in table FM.2.2.
o For example, if No. 5 is pressed, the tone combination 770 Hz/1336 Hz will be the result.
The tone frequencies have to be accurate within ∀ 1.5 % .
o Each tone burst should be between 65 and 105 msec long. The pause between tones
should be at least 200 msec.
• User functions: To control the basic functions of repeaters and voice-mailboxes, the following
codes should be used :
Basic commands :
6. * Repeater opens, ( like the 1750 Hz )
7. * + 0 Repeater opens and transmits callsign, location and - if necessary- the CTCSS tone.
8. * + 1..9 Additional functions ( squelch control, power level and others )
These basic commands can be extended and it is possible to control special functions of the
repeaters or voice-mailboxes

CTCSS frequencies Hz to be used for repeater access

CTCSS FREQUENCIES IN Hz TO BE USED FOR REPEATER ACCESS

67,0 94.8 131.8 186.2

71.9 100.0 141.3 203.5

74.4 103.5 146.2 210.7

77.0 107.2 151.4 218.1

79.7 110.9 156.7 225.7

82.5 114.8 162.2 233.6

85.4 118.8 167.9 241.8

88.5 123.0 173.8 250.3

91.5 127.3 179.9

VHF Handbook 9.00 126/180


IARU-R1

DTMF frequency pairs

DTMF FREQUENCY PAIRS

Hz 1209 1336 1477 1633

697 1 2 3 4

770 4 5 6 B

852 7 8 9 C

941 * 0 # D

VHF Handbook 9.00 127/180


IARU-R1
DIGITAL TRANSMISSIONS
Principles for digital modes
The increase in digital modes, their rate of change, innovative developments and on air activity should be
considered in a more strategic and less prescriptive manner.
There has been a trend by both IARU and national regulators to be ‘Technology Neutral’, particularly for
high-level recommendations, to ensure they do not specify a particular mode. Indeed, IARU Region-1 C5
has led this by using general terms such as MGM or DV.

The increase in digital modes should be facilitated where possible by reviewing and relaxing Bandwidth
restrictions that may have their origins in classical analogue modes (CW, SSB etc) – and may now impede
new data modes.

The use of computing/automation can however undermine the criteria for valid QSOs for Contests, Awards
etc. The IARU-R1 QSO definition should still be respected.

Therefor the interim meeting in Vienna 2019 adopted following principles:


• Mode Neutrality: The Band Plans in the VHF Managers Handbook shall remain Mode-Neutral as
far as possible including for MGM, Digital Voice(DV), Digital Data (DD) and DATV, avoiding
frequency designations for specific digital modes
• Whilst the IARU Band Plans should adhere to the ‘Mode Neutrality’ principle above, Member
Societies remain free at national level to coordinate specific mode designations
• Bandwidth restrictions should be reviewed and relaxed where possible to facilitate experimental
and emerging digital communications modes (but the need to be mode-neutral should still be
observed)
• Digital Developers should be encouraged to avoid embedding or recommending spot frequencies,
and instead to consult IARU band planners and incorporate flexibility
• Valid QSOs for contests and awards etc shall respect the IARU-R1 QSO definition and in particular
the criteria that the human operator is responsible. This requires that such contacts are not
invalidated by the use of automation – such as auto-completion, databases etc.

Packet-radio (mailbox) operating practice


At the IARU Region 1 Conference in Torremolinos (1990) the following recommendation was adopted:

The Conference endorses the views expressed in documents 90/TS/C3.50 and 90/TS/C.53 on the
undesirability of spreading of inappropriate messages via Packet-Radio Bulletin Board Systems and
would extend this view to any use of the amateur bands which contravenes the definitions of the
Amateur Service and Amateur Satellite Service.

You will find document 90/TS/C3.53 contained the IARU Administrative Council Resolution 87-2 (revised in
1989) in chapter 6.6.
Document 90/TS/C3.50 was a paper submitted by ARI, which with regard to messages having
inappropriate content in essence expressed the same views as AC Resolution 87-2.

At its meeting in Bandung, October 1991, the IARU Administrative Council re-considered the matter of
inappropriate traffic via Packet Radio, and drafted an additional Resolution 91-1. At its meeting in Vienna,
March 1992, the IARU Region 1 VHF/UHF/Microwaves Committee decided to recommend the immediate
introduction of this Resolution as interim Region 1 policy. This was accepted by the IARU Region 1
Executive Council at its meeting in Budapest, April 1992, and later ratified by the IARU Region 1
Conference in De Haan (1993). The AC Resolution 91-1 is attached as chapter 6.7.

VHF Handbook 9.00 128/180


IARU-R1
Concerning the relaying of messages to amateur stations
RESOLUTION 87 2 (Revised 1989)

The IARU Administrative Council, Noordwijkerhout, April 1987:

Recognising the problems caused by the handling by amateur stations of communications having
inappropriate content, particularly with regard to business and commercial matters
Recognising the impact on other users of the crowded spectrum from unattended store and forward
("mailbox") stations, and further recognising that the problem of controlling the content of amateur
radiocommunication is made more difficult by the availability of such stations,
Resolves that the Administrative Council affirms the action taken at its Buenos Aires meeting, in
urging member societies to emphasize to their members the importance of adhering to the spirit and
intentions of the ITU Radio Regulations, and of handling only that traffic which does conform; and
further
Resolves that member societies are hereby urged to acquaint their members as to the undesirable
aspects of the uncontrolled proliferation of unattended store and forward ("mailbox") stations.

VHF Handbook 9.00 129/180


IARU-R1
Concerning guidelines for packet radio
RESOLUTION 91-2

The IARU Administrative Council, Bandung, October 1991,

Considering the growing popularity of packet radio for the relaying of messages between radio
amateurs,
Recognizing that a medium as effective as packet radio can invite abuse through the introduction of
traffic that is inappropriate to the Amateur Service internationally,
Noting Resolution 87-2 (revised 1989) which urges adherence to the spirit and intentions of the ITU
Radio Regulations in handling traffic, and calls attention to the undesirable aspects of the
uncontrolled proliferation of unattended store-and-forward "mailbox" stations,
Resolves that the attached "Guidelines for Packet Radio Operators" and "Guidelines for Packet
Radio Bulletin Board Operators" first adopted at the Region 3 Conference, Bandung, October 1991,
shall be distributed to IARU member-societies worldwide with the request that they be shared with
the amateurs of each country, and
further resolves that future IARU regional conferences are invited to suggest improvements to these
guidelines so they will continue to be representative of good amateur radio operating practices as
these practices evolve over time.

VHF Handbook 9.00 130/180


IARU-R1
IPv6 allocation
Varna 2014

The IARU Region-1 VHF/Microwave Committee (C5) recommends that in order to underpin an exciting
future for amateur data communications that the IARU Administrative Council considers the draft paper
from Region 1 and provides support for obtaining an IPv6 allocation for global amateur radio.

VHF Handbook 9.00 131/180


IARU-R1
Digital voice
ÖVSV will start activities for gaining interoperability in bridging technology for Digital Voice modes.

VHF Handbook 9.00 132/180


IARU-R1
AMATEUR TELEVISION

FM-ATV (Recommendation V.2. )


For ATV experiments above 1 GHz a recommendation was adopted at the 1991 Torremolinos Conference.
The recommendation was based upon the emerging standards for satellite TV transmitters, but as in many
of the microwave amateur bands the available spectrum was limited, a channel bandwidth of 18 MHz (-60
dB) was recommended. Although the standard was adopted without much discussion, at the 1996 Tel Aviv
conference it was decided that it was not possible to adhere to the given bandwidth limitation when
complying with all other parts of the recommendation. This was due to the recommended audio sub-
carriers at 5.5 or 6 MHz .
At the Lillehammer 1999 Conference the standard was amended in the shared microwave bands. Although
the level of the spectrum outside the main spectral lobe is not yet ideal, the standard is now more realistic.

VHF Handbook 9.00 133/180


IARU-R1
BEACON REQUIREMENTS
Beacon message

As beacons are often heard at very low signal levels, together with spurious signals, it is important the
message is simple, unambiguous and repeated frequently. It is also necessary to have a period without
information (“carrier”) for frequency checking purposes and signal strength measurement; and also to
make it easy to distinguish the frequency when using F1A.
• For a coordinated beacon, the only essential information in the beacon message is the callsign.
The locator or other information is not essential
• The callsign should be sent in plain CW at least once per minute, not exceeding 60 characters per
minute
• Beacons should include a period of plain carrier of approximately 20-30s, sufficient for frequency
checking purposes.
• For mixed mode beacons, the MGM mode should start on the even minute, whilst the odd minute
includes the plain carrier period. Effort should be made to ensure good timing accuracy of the
even/odd minutes.
• It may be helpful to indicate a forthcoming change of mode by a short CW symbol (such as an ‘S’ or
‘X’)
• For beacons that are MGM only (which should only be exceptions to the other recommendations)
then the message should be MGM at the start, followed by the CW ID within a minute period.

Examples of these (with approximate message lengths) are illustrated below:- Simple 30 & 60 second
Messages

CW ID Carrie
r

0s 30s

CW ID Carrier ‘S’ Other

0s 30 60s

MGM Mixed Mode (these are examples and can be change to suit the MGM mode deployed – Varna
2014)
MGM CW- Carrier ‘X’ Other CW-ID
ID

0s 30 60s 90 120s

VHF Handbook 9.00 134/180


IARU-R1

MGM Mixed Mode

MGM CW-ID Carrier

0s 60s

MGM Mixed Mode

MGM CW-ID Carrier CW-


ID

0s 60s

MGM

MGM CW-
ID

0s 60s

Operation
• Operation should be 24 hour continuous.
• If beacons change parameters during the transmission this must be reflected in the message
transmitted.
• IARU Region-1 encourages best practice for both timing/frequency accuracy and phase noise to
enhance general performance for the benefit of all.
• That development of new modes optimised for beacons are encouraged, which may either
enhance DX reception or permit more efficient equipment (and thus lower electricity costs) to
enhance sustainability
• That National Societies and IARU-R1 coordinators be kept updated on such developments.

VHF Handbook 9.00 135/180


IARU-R1
Beacons spectrum

Should MGM be implemented on a beacon, a standard 1kHz tuning offset should be adopted as per the
example in the diagram.
In any given frequency band, the specific MGM selection should have regard to the beacon frequency
spacing and MGM bandwidth

Status
It is important that the operational parameters and the status of each beacon are widely known. The
information should be sent to the IARU Region 1 VHF beacon coordinator via the local beacon

VHF Handbook 9.00 136/180


IARU-R1
PROPAGATION RESEARCH BY AMATEURS
Introduction
Amateurs have always contributed to radio science, both in the technical field, e.g. with the development of
new transmitting and receiving methods, and in the field of propagation research by showing the limits of
distance and the variety of propagation phenomena that can be used over an ever increasing range of
frequencies.

Regarding propagation, amateur contributions during the first years of radio in the 'world below 200 metres'
are, of course, well-known, as are, for instance, the pioneering efforts of the "amateur" Grote Reber in the
field of radio-astronomy. Those were the early days, but also in more recent times amateurs have made
considerable contributions in the field of scientific investigations. To mention a few examples:
• in the fifties several research institutes in Western Europe carried out tropo-scatter research in
close co-operation with an extensive network of amateur observer stations;
• fundamental work was and is done by amateurs in the definition and study of the TE
(Trans-Equatorial) propagation mode of VHF radio-waves;
• during the IGY (International Geophysical Year), amateurs supported various propagation research
projects initiated by the Max Planck Institute in Katlenburg/Lindau as well as by other scientific
institutes.

The important facts which enable amateurs to make valuable contributions to propagation research are:
• world-wide there are almost no regions which are not covered by amateurs. If effectively organised,
amateurs constitute an extensive network of observation points that an official research institute
could hardly afford to set up;
• amateurs are enthusiastic in the disciplines they pursue, are often on the bands for extended periods
of time - pushing the various propagation modes to their limits! - and in many cases, are in
possession of high-performance, individually-calibrated pieces of transmitting/receiving equipment.

IARU Region I fully recognizes the importance of this type of work in the Amateur Service, and at the IARU
Region 1 Conference in Warsaw (1975) the following general recommendation was adopted:
• Groups of amateurs shall be organised to carry out scientific observations regarding all forms of
radio propagation, including
1. ionospheric
2. tropospheric
3. space.
• These groups are recommended to co-operate closely with RSGB, DARC, REF and any other
societies which have a proper organisation for handling scientific data and co-operating with scientific
institutes.
• It is also recommended that the results of such observations be published in the journals of member
societies and/or scientific journals.

Currently, in the international field, amateurs are involved in long-term studies of tropospheric and auroral
propagation modes, long range ionospheric high MUF studies and the study of the characteristics of
moonbounce and meteor-scatter techniques.

VHF Handbook 9.00 137/180


IARU-R1
On a national scale amateurs co-operate in the development of repeater systems for mobile station use,
together with studies of terrain and inner city problems associated with operating mobile stations.

Furthermore, studies are carried out on the effects of micro (local) climate on space communications and,
in particular, on microwave band communications during adverse weather conditions like e.g. heavy rain,
which can enhance signals considerably.

The above is certainly not an exhaustive summary; on the contrary, the list of scientific activities in which
amateurs participate is expanding all the time.

Coordination of amateur participation in propagation research


As set out in the introduction (section IVa), IARU as well as IARU Region 1 have always recognized the
importance of scientific work carried out by amateurs, and IARU Region 1 are officially supporting various
activities of member societies in the field of propagation research.
Currently the RSGB, via their RSGB Propagation Studies Committee, and the SARL are the member
society which co-ordinate the amateur participation in propagation research.

Sporadic-E investigations
At the IARU region 1 Conference in Warsaw (1975) REF proposed to start on two projects:
• a study of long distance VHF propagation with the aid of beacons to be set up in the southern part
of Europe
• a study of sporadic-E activity over the North Atlantic area, particularly on the amateur bands 28
MHz and 50 MHz.
Both projects were accepted at the final Plenary Meeting of this Conference, and the work of supervising
these projects was entrusted to Serge Canivenc, F8SH, who was nominated as IARU Region 1
Coordinator for sporadic-E investigations.
The following recommendations concerning the above projects were adopted at the IARU Region 1
Conference at Warsaw (1975):
Sporadic-E investigations: that the proposal to establish beacon stations in southern Europe, as
described in document WA58 (with the exception that the radiated power should preferably be
limited to 50 W) be adopted. Proposals for beacons should be submitted through member societies
to the IARU Region 1 Sporadic-E Coordinator Mr. Serge Canivenc, F8SH.

Transatlantic Sporadic-E investigations: that the proposals set out in document WA59 be adopted in order
to promote an investigation of Sporadic-E propagation in the North Atlantic area. It is also recommended
that Region 2 be invited by Region 1 to encourage their member societies to set up, for the purpose of the
investigation, beacon stations in the 50 MHz band, e.g.in Canada and in the U.S.A. Region 1 societies
should then establish an observation network in consultation with Mr. Serge Canivenc, F8SH, the IARU
Region 1 Sporadic-E Coordinator. Region 2 is invited to join the programme and to publicise the contents
of document WA59.

On the basis of the above recommendations, F8SH extended his activities and started a programme for
the investigation of VHF wave propagation via Field Aligned Irregularities (FAI). This phenomenon was
discovered by amateurs in southern Europe in the 70's. They noticed that stations contacted during
sporadic-E openings were often on a quite different bearing from the one corresponding to the normal
great-circle path.
F8SH fulfilled the function of IARU Region 1 Sporadic-E Coordinator till July 1988 when he suddenly
passed away. His excellent work, his many publications and his highly appreciated representation of the
Amateur Service in the CCIR Interim Working Party 6/8 dealing with anomalous VHF ionospheric
propagation will be remembered with gratitude.

VHF Handbook 9.00 138/180


IARU-R1
He was succeeded by Jim Bacon, G3YLA ( address in section If) who will continue and further develop
the work started by F8SH.

Auroral propagation
At the IARU Region I Conference in Warsaw (1975) the RSGB, via their Propagation Studies Committee,
proposed to standardize auroral reporting by amateurs throughout Region I, so that the greatest use can
be made of these reports for scientific studies.
At the final Plenary Meeting of the Conference this proposal was adopted, and Charlie Newton, G2FKZ,
was nominated as IARU Region 1 Coordinator for Auroral Studies.

The following recommendation relating to the auroral project was adopted at the IARU Region 1
Conference in Warsaw (1975):
VHF Auroral Propagation: that the proposals set out in document WA32 (regarding the
standardisation of auroral reporting) be adopted by member societies and that member societies
publicise the reporting forms contained therein.

In 1993 G2FKZ resigned, and the IARU Region 1 Conference in De Haan (September 1993) nominated as
his successor Vaino Lehtoranta, OH2LX (address in section If)

Tropospheric propagation studies


At the IARU Region 1 Conference in Warsaw (1975), on the proposal of the RSGB Propagation Studies
Committee IARU Region 1 nominated as Tropospheric Propagation Studies Coordinator
Mr. R.G.Flavell, G3LTP. He resigned from this post at the conference in Tel Aviv 1996.
At the moment a successor is sought for. He will have to look into propagation effects on the microwaves (
such as ‘rainscatter’ )

Information exchange programme


The RSGB Propagation Studies Committee hold the official solar and ionospheric data back to the IGY,
the International Geophysical Year (1967), and any information can be supplied upon application to RSGB
Headquarters.
Tape/slides lecture material on auroral propagation is also available via the Hon. Secretary of IARU
Region I

Co-operation with CCIR study groups and publications


Co-operation has been established with the CCIR propagation study groups 5 for tropospheric
propagation, and 6 for ionospheric propagation.

Five IARU Region 1 propagation reports were submitted to CCIR study groups via F8SH, the former IARU
Region 1 Sporadic-E Studies Coordinator, and, where appropriate, the attention of CCIR study groups has
been and is drawn to the results of amateur investigations/observations which could be used fruitfully in
their studies.

Some scientific publications which have used amateur data are


• Tropo I.E.R.E. Conference Proceedings 40 (1978) pp 265-280
1. I.E.E. Conference Publication 169 (1978) Pt 2 pp 182-186
2. I.E.E. Conference Publication 195 (1981) Pt 2 pp 163-167
3. I.E.E. Conference Publication 219 (1983) Pt 2 pp 14- 18
4. I.E.E. Conference Publication 248 (1985) pp 498-501
• Aurora I.E.E. Conference Publication 219 (1983) Pt 2 pp 259-262
1. T.E.P. I.E.E. Conference Publication 219 (1983) Pt 2 pp 325-328

VHF Handbook 9.00 139/180


IARU-R1

Action/support required from IARU Region 1 member societies


IARU Region 1 considers it of the utmost importance that member societies stimulate and encourage the
participation of amateurs in scientific and propagation studies. To this end wide publicity should be given to
the projects already in progress, and possibilities for new projects and/or extensions of existing projects
should be investigated.

In all this work close co-operation with the existing Coordinators and/or coordinating institutes is strongly
recommended. As already indicated, for publications member societies can obtain information at the
addresses given above.

This type of work can open a whole new field of extremely interesting activities for amateurs!
To mention a few examples:
• Now that in some European Region 1 countries the 50 MHz band has been opened for amateur
use, every effort should be made to increase the number of beacons and observation stations on
this band, where many propagation modes can be studied, including modes such as back-scatter
meteor trails, and, at suitable solar times, high M.U.F. propagation. As this band is not yet
universally available for the Amateur Service, listening stations can play an important role here!
• VHF Managers/Contest Committees etc. should be aware of the possibility of using contest logs for
the derivation of data useful for scientific studies. These logs often contain a wealth of data
covering a wide geographical area, providing detailed information, particularly on tropospheric
propagation, that could not be obtained in any other way. This is an excellent illustration of the main
strength of the Amateur Service: the mass of observation stations!

Reporting forms (log sheets), used in the various projects and showing the data that preferably should be
gathered by the participants, as well as the necessary information and instructions are obtainable from the
addresses given above.
Some reporting forms already in use are appended to this section, together with some examples of
information sheets accompanying these reporting forms.

Cooperation with the DUBUS magazine


In order to facilitate the flow of information from amateurs to the coordinators a cooperation with DUBUS
has been arranged in 1995 whereby the relevant DUBUS editors will share the information received with
the IARU Region 1 coordinators.

Propagation database
At the IARU Region 1 Conference 1999 in Lillehammer the offer of Michael Kastelic, OE1MCU, was
accepted to create a easily accessible database for the collection and distribution of amateur reports.
Appendix Sample reporting forms and information sheets ( nov 96)

VHF Handbook 9.00 140/180


IARU-R1
VHF/UHF/µWAVES RECORDS
The desirability of having a list of national and international records on VHF, UHF, and MICROWAVES,
which would give a good impression of the progress made by amateurs in the course of the years, has
been recognized for a long time. At the meeting of the VHF Working Group in Amsterdam (1976)
SM5AGM, Folke Rasvall, then VHF Manager of SSA, offered to compile an IARU Region I record table for
the different modes of wave propagation. This offer was accepted with thanks, and it was agreed that:
VHF Managers shall send OZ1FF (oz1ff@mail.dk) a list of their national DX records, covering the
various modes of propagation, i.e. tropospheric, aurora, meteor scatter, sporadic-E and EME, for
each of the VHF, UHF and Microwaves bands; b) the information, after having been collated by
SM5AGM, shall be sent to the Hon. Secretary of IARU Region I for publication in the Region I News,
e.g. once per annum; c) the VHF Manager shall sent the information on any new record established
in his country immediately to SM5AGM.

The following recommendation was adopted at the IARU Region I Conference in Opatija (1966):
In principle all QSO's via a translator system shall be in a special class and shall not be eligible for
inclusion in normal Countries Worked lists or for DX-record awards. A special list for translator
QSO's shall be established.

Each year the IARU Region I record table as well as the national record table should be published in
the national amateur radio magazine, accompanied by a request to the readers for submitting
necessary changes. Claimed records should be carefully checked. For instance, for tropo records
check the weather map for the day in question, for sporadic-E records check the time of the year and
the time of day and, if possible, compare the claim with reports on other QSO's made during the
opening. It has occurred that long meteor- scatter bursts were taken for a short sporadic-E opening!
Be also aware of the possibility that 28, 21 or 14 MHz QSO's may mistakenly be reported as 145 MHz
QSO's by stations using transverter systems. Check whether QSL cards have been exchanged.
Please note that records are only established for different propagation modes, and that the Region I
list does not deal with different transmission modes (CW, SSB etc.) or with "firsts". From the above
it is clear that a sound record table can only be established in close co-operation with all national
VHF and Microwave Managers or Committees.

At the IARU Region I Sub Working Group in Vienna 2013, OZ1FF, was elected as the successor of
SM7NZB .
DX Records Coordinator
OZ1FF
Kjeld Bülow Thomsen
kjeld@oz1ff.dk

For the latest list of records please visit: http://dxrecords.vushf.dk

VHF Handbook 9.00 141/180


IARU-R1

PART 5
HISTORICAL DATA

VHF Handbook 9.00 142/180


IARU-R1

LIST OF CHANGES
Version 9.00
• Update VHF managers list
• Decisions from the VGC Novi Sad 2020 added
Version 8.50 (Interim meeting Vienna 2019)
• Update VHF managers list
• Defending our bands: 50 MHz and from 1GHz to 10 GHz
• European table of frequency allocation
• Adjusting the 435MHz, 1.2GHZ 2.3GHz, 3.4GHz band plan
• Additional band plans for 8 and 5m band in Ireland
• Financing the contest robot
• Satellites transmitting in our bands without permission
• Principles for digital transmissions
• Digital voice coordination
Version 8.12
• Alternative lay-out and partition from handbook 8.02
Version 8.02
• New contest rules added (2018)
Version 8.01
• Typo’s
Version 8.00
• Complete review of the handbook
• Decisions from Landshut 2017 added

Version 7.51
• Editing bandplan 144 and 434 MHz
• Footnote 70 MHz
Version 7.50
• Update VHF managers list
• Delete some footnotes in the 144 MHz band plan
• Adjusting 5 GHz band plan
• 5.2.2 is not for ATV
• 5.3.11: monitoring stations
• 5.3.10 major edit
• 5.3.6: adding examples
• 5.3.8: exchanges outside R1
• 5.3.2: 6H contest category
• Added guidelines foor the PSect in the EDI files
• Rules for the contest robots
• Contest organizers
• Winners will be published on te IARU-R1 website
• Delete all WSPR frequencies

Version 7.00 (decisions from Varna 2014 added)


• Information about repeaters (1.6.5 and 10.1)
• DX Code of Conduct, Remote Control and TV Repeater Spectrum Compatibility added to Sec-2
• ITU and WRC Frequency Allocations Process (3.2)
• DX code of conduct (2.8)
• Major update from the contest section(5.2 and 5.3)
• Radar (added 7.12)
• WSPR: footnotes added where needed
• Satellite downlinks on 144 MHz
• Updated band planning issues (recommendations from Varna 2014 and layout of footnotes)
• New point 11.3 about the synchronized 50 MHz beacon project
• IPv6 allocation for amateur use (8.3.3)
• DATV footnotes on 435 MHz and technical recommendations 8.3.4.
• Complete review of ATV contest rules

Version 6.14
• Update VHF manager list

VHF Handbook 9.00 143/180


IARU-R1
• Minor errors fixed

Version 6.11 (decisions from Vienna 2013 added)


• Update VHF manager list
• Minor errors fixed
• VALID CONTACTS Updated and supplemented (7.4.9)
• TECHNICAL STANDARDS FOR FM REPEATERS IN THE 145 MHz and 435 MHz BANDS updated (8.8.4)
• Entries changed (contest: 5.3.10)
• WSPR Beacons frequency changed to 144.4920
• 70.3000 FAX removed
• 2m, 70cm and 23cm changes in usage
• 2m Band Updated
• 8.8.11. recommendations for DATV added
• 11.1.7 Beacons spectrum added

Version 6.01
• Update VHF manager list
• Minor errors fixed

Version 6.00 (decisions from Sun City added)


• Update VHF manager list
• Minor errors fixed
• IARU Region 1 band planning: Principles – Repeater coordination added ( 2.2 )
• CTCS frequency added ( 8.2.1 )
• FREQUENCY SPACING updated ( 5.1.4 )
• BEACON MESSAGE updated ( 11.1 )
• extra guidance for beacons added ( 11.2 )
• 67Hz added to the Table FM.2.1.
• Update Text CTCSS ( 8.2.1 )
• All bandplans up to 78Hz modified to 4 columns (frequency / maximum bandwidth / mode / usage)
• 50-52 MHz Bandplan Updated
• 70-70,5 MHz Bandplan Updated
• 144 - 146 MHz Bandplan - Repeater segment extended
• 1250 MHz Bandplan updated
• 2320 MHz Bandplan updated
• 3400 MHz Bandplan updated
• 134 - 141 GHz Bandplan Updated
• ATV contest updated
• Contest judging of entries updated ( 5.9.3 )
• Additional contest Segment 144,500 – 144,700 MHz added ( )
• Multiplier updated ( 5.9.1 )
• Complete new Amateur Satellite chapter ( 3 ) - (thanks to Graham Shirville, G3VZV

VHF Handbook 9.00 144/180


IARU-R1
IARU INFORMATION
IARU Region 1 VHF/UHF/µWaves Committee
Constitution and terms of reference of the IARU-R1 VHF/UHF/µWaves Commitee
At the IARU Region 1 Conference in Opatija (1966) the VHF Committee (Committee B) submitted
recommendations to the final Plenary Session concerning the constitution and terms of reference for an
IARU Region 1 VHF Committee and for an IARU Region 1 VHF Working Group which would continue the
work in the intervals between successive Conferences. The Plenary Session decided to refer these
recommendations (H and I) to the IARU Region 1 Executive Committee for further consideration.

At the meeting of the Executive Committee of IARU Region 1, held on 28 October 1967, the above
recommendations were approved with minor alterations.

At the IARU Region 1 Conference in Noordwijkerhout (1987) a completely re-written IARU Region 1
Constitution was adopted. As a consequence the VHF Committee and the VHF Working Group were
transformed into a so-called Specialised (Permanent) Body, the IARU Region 1 VHF/UHF/Microwaves
Committee, with the same terms of reference as the previously existing VHF Committee c.q. Working
Group.

In these basic documents the whole structure as well as the working procedures of IARU Region 1 and the
IARU can be found. Consequently, this is recommended reading!

Constitution and Bye-Laws of the IARU Region 1


Please visit: www.iaru-r1.org

Constitution and Bye-Laws of the IARU


Please visit: www.iaru.org

VHF Handbook 9.00 145/180


IARU-R1
IARU Region 1 Conferences

1950 Paris
1953 Lausanne
1956 Stresa
1958 Bad Godesberg
1960 Folkestone
1963 Malmo
1966 Opatija
1969 Brussels
1972 Scheveningen
1975 Warsaw
1978 Miskolc Tapolca
1981 Brighton
1984 Cefalu
1987 Noordwijkerhout
1990 Torremolinos
1993 De Haan
1996 Tel Aviv (Israel)
1999 Lillehammer (Norway)
2002 San Marino
2005 Davos (Switzerland)
2008 Cavtat (Croatia)
2011 Sun City (South Africa)
2014 Varna (Bulgaria)
2017 Landshut (Germany)
2020 Virtual General Conference (due to COVID-19, should be held in Novi Sad, Servia)

IARU Region 1 VHF/UHF/Microwaves Committee Chairs

• Dick Harms PA2DW (2020 - )


• Jacques Verleijen ON4AVJ (2014 - 2020)
• Michael Kastelic, OE1MCU (2005 - 2014)
• Arie Dogterom, PA0EZ (1993 - 2005)
• Kees van Dijk PA0QC (sk) (1967 -1993)

VHF Handbook 9.00 146/180


IARU-R1
Notes on tasks IARU-R1 and its VHF/UHF/µWaves committee
In view of the fact that the 435 MHz band is shared with the Radiolocation Service, and that difficulties
have arisen regarding the frequencies allocated to the Syledis radiolocation system by some licensing
authorities, the following recommendation was adopted at the IARU Region I Conference in Cefalu (1984):
On short notice societies in countries bordering the North Sea will again approach their P & T
authorities with an urgent request to reconsider, both nationally and in the appropriate international
co-operative bodies, the frequency allocation for the Syledis system in view of its incompatibility
with the long- established Amateur Service in the 435 MHz band.

Regarding the allocation of bands to the Amateur Services the following recommendation was adopted at
the IARU Region I Conference in Cefalu (1984):
As a few authorities in the European part of Region I have allowed some amateur activity in the 50
MHz part of the spectrum, societies are urged to again approach their P & T authorities with the aim
of obtaining an allocation or assignment preferably between 50 and 55 MHz. In view of the TV activity
still present in this part of the spectrum, in the first instance permission may be sought for operation
outside TV broadcast hours, e.g. for experimental purposes for a selected number of stations.

A further recommendation regarding the 50 MHz band was adopted at the meeting of the IARU Region 1
VHF/UHF/Microwaves Committee in Vienna, March 1992, and accepted as interim IARU Region 1 policy
by the IARU Region 1 Executive Committee at their meeting in Budapest, April 1992. This
recommendation was ratified at the IARU Region 1 Conference in De Haan (1993) and reads:
All IARU Region 1 member societies in countries where the Amateur Service is currently not
permitted to use the 50 MHz band shall endeavour to obtain such a permission in the 50 - 54 MHz
band. This permission should preferably be permanent and under the same conditions as valid for
the normal licences. In order to obtain a common IARU Region 1 band, the allocation band obtained
should at least contain the frequency segment 50 - 50.5 MHz.

At the meeting of the IARU Region 1 VHF/UHF/Microwaves Committee in Düsseldorf (1989) the following
recommendation regarding the shared microwave bands was adopted and a few weeks later approved as
interim IARU Region 1 policy by the IARU Region 1 Executive Committee at their meeting in Torremolinos,
April 1989. The IARU Region 1 Conference at Torremolinos, April 1990, ratified this recommendation:
IARU and IARU Region 1 should maintain their basic policy of trying to retain all wideband secondary
allocations in the Microwave bands.
Note. This IARU policy is clearly set out in paper C3.35, submitted to the IARU Region 1 Conference
at De Haan (1993) by the International Secretariat of IARU. At this Conference the paper (see 1.3.1.)
was adopted by IARU Region 1.

However, IARU and IARU Region 1 should also endeavour to convince Administrations that in all countries
the same small region-wide common segments - in the order of 2 MHz wide - should be allocated to the
Amateur Service, as commonality is a practical necessity for international amateur activities.
N.B. Already at the IARU Region 1 Conference in Noordwijkerhout (April 1987) IARU Region 1 nominated
a VHF/UHF/Microwave Frequency Allocation Coordinator (see section Id). His terms of reference include
carrying out the work mentioned above in behalf of IARU Region 1.

At the WARC in Torremolinos (1990) the status of the Mobile Service in the frequency segment
2300 - 2450 MHz was upgraded to Primary (see Frequency Allocation Tables). The Mobile Service and the
Amateur Services must be considered to be practically incompatible, as far as the use of frequencies is
concerned. Hence IARU Region 1 is making vigorous efforts - via approaches by member societies to
Administrations, as well as indirect approaches to, for instance, the CEPT - to get a reasonable and
common part of this frequency segment de facto or de jure exclusively allocated to the Amateur Service.

VHF Handbook 9.00 147/180


IARU-R1
Within CEPT a large programme has been initiated from 1993 onwards to create a harmonised European
frequency table. Detailed Spectrum Investigations (DSI) have been arranged and IARU Region 1 and its
member societies have actively contributed to those studies. In the microwave bands this has led to
retention of the existing allocations in the ITU table and in addition to a recommendation that
administrations should allocate spectrum in the 3400-3500 MHz band to their amateurs. Moreover the
concept of virtually exclusive narrow segments in the microwave bands has been recognised by the CEPT.

Currently amateurs in 4X, 5B, 9A, OH, OK, OZ and PA have got access to 3400-3410 MHz in addition to
the (ITU footnote) allocations in Bulgaria, Norway, Poland, Germany, Slovenia and Great Britain.

The CEPT discussions about the spectrum 29.7 - 960 MHz have not yet finished in 1996 and in particular
the 430-440 MHz amateur allocation, which in several Region 1 countries already is smaller or of a lower
status, is under attack. At the IARU Region 1 VHF/UHF/Microwaves committee meeting in Vienna 1995
the thread to the 435 MHz band was taken seriously and all member societies in the CEPT countries were
urged to lobby for retention of the "full allocation".

At the IARU Administrative Council (AC) meeting in Bandung, October 1991, the misuse of amateur bands
was discussed, i.e. the use of these bands for purposes which have nothing to do with the Amateur
Services by, for instance, research institutes, groups of people interested in forwarding technical
information in aid of developing countries etc. - sometimes with the permission of the pertaining
Administration!

Resolution 91-1 was drafted, which set out procedures aimed at giving the regional IARU organisations
more possibilities for taking action in defence of the interests of the Amateur Services.

At the meeting of the IARU Region 1 VHF/UHF/Microwaves Committee in Vienna (March 1992) the
following recommendation was adopted, which in April 1992 was approved by the IARU Region 1
Executive Committee at their meeting in Budapest, and later ratified by the IARU Region 1 Conference in
De Haan (1993):
Resolution 91-1 of the IARU Administrative Council is recommended for immediate adoption as
interim IARU Region 1 policy until ratification by the next Region 1 Conference.

Resolution 91-1 (concerning the improper use of the amateur bands)


The IARU Administrative Council, Bandung, October 1991,
considering
• the increasing number of reports received from the amateur community regarding improper use of
the amateur bands,
• that in accordance with the IARU Constitution, it is the obligation of the IARU and its
member-societies to defend the interests of the Amateur Services,
• that the ITU, having no enforcement authority, is unable to address such matters directly,
resolves
• that member societies shall aggressively pursue the processing of their own administrations of
documented complaints of improper use of the amateur bands,
• that documented cases of improper use of the amateur bands that cannot be solved by the
member society with its administration shall be forwarded by the member-society to its regional
IARU organisation, and
• that any cases of improper use of amateur bands processed through an IARU regional organisation
shall be handled according to the following procedure:
1. The cases shall be referred to the regional IARU MS coordinator in the region where the
transmitting station is located.

VHF Handbook 9.00 148/180


IARU-R1
2. As soon as possible after receiving a case, the regional IARU MS coordinator will verify the
report and ensure that all pertinent information is included.
3. Upon verification, the IARU MS coordinator will ask the regional secretary to report the
incident to the appropriate member-society in the region.
4. The member-society will promptly submit the report to its administration.
5. The member-society must advise the regional secretary within 30 days after receiving the
report:
 the date the report was presented to its administration;
 to whom it was presented;
 any formal or informal response of the administration.
and further resolves
• that the IARU MS regional coordinators are encouraged to keep a log by country in their region of
cases of improper use of the amateur bands and to issue a summary report to the regional
secretary once a year;
• that regional conferences are encouraged to include in their conference agendas a review of cases
of improper use of the amateur bands,
• that member-societies are encouraged to seek, in their countries, restrictions on the sale of
amateur transmitting equipment to persons who do not hold amateur licenses, and
• that if a member-society is unable or unwilling to present a report of improper use of the amateur
bands to its own administration, the member-society may request the regional organisation to
present the report directly to its administration.

Deleted functions
Frequency allocations coordinator
It is been decided in Landshut that this function is redundant and it is deleted
At the IARU Region 1 Conference at Noordwijkerhout (April 1987) the final Plenary Session adopted a
proposal from Committee B (now, under the new IARU Region 1 Constitution, the VHF/UHF/Microwaves
Committee) to nominate a VHF/UHF/Microwaves Frequency Allocation Coordinator.
The task of the Coordinator can be summarized as follows:
Collect information from Region 1 member societies about the specific VHF/UHF/Microwaves
frequency allocations to the Amateur (Satellite) Service in their countries
To use the information obtained for the creation of a survey of deviations from the allocations to the
Amateur (Satellite) Service as found in the ITU frequency table, and to publish this information
regularly in the VHF Newsletter and/or the Region 1 News.
To make proposals for a coordinated approach of the licensing authorities in the various countries of
Region 1 by member societies with the aim of obtaining common frequency allocations, especially
in the shared Microwaves bands.
N.B. In their recommendation to the Plenary Session Committee B considered this point to be most
urgent in view of the fact that in various countries the authorities were already allocating segments
of shared bands to the various Services without any form of co-ordination as far as the Amateur
(Satellite) Service was concerned.
To provide, in as far as possible, the Committees and Working Groups of the CEPT and the OIRT with
background material on the IARU and IARU Region 1 standpoints with regard to UHF/Microwaves
frequency allocations to the Amateur (Satellite) Service. In matters of policy the
VHF/UHF/Microwaves Frequency Allocation Coordinator will work in close consultation with the
Chairman of the IARU Region 1 VHF/UHF/Microwaves Committee and the Executive Committee of
IARU Region 1.

The VHF/UHF/Microwaves Frequency Allocation Coordinator will submit reports on actions taken, results
obtained and future plans to the IARU Region 1 VHF/UHF/Microwaves Committee for consideration at
their meetings during IARU Region 1 Conferences or in between Conferences. At the final Plenary
VHF Handbook 9.00 149/180
IARU-R1
Session of the IARU Region 1 Conference at Noordwijkerhout (April 1987) Arie Dogterom, PA0EZ, was
nominated as VHF/UHF/Microwaves Frequency Allocation Coordinator. At the meeting of the
VHF/UHF/Microwaves Committee in Vienna (February 1995) John Morris, GM4ANB, was nominated as
his successor. At the 1999 Conference in Lillehammer GM4ANB stepped down. PA0EZ temporarily took
over. In April 2000 Heinz-Günter Böttcher, DK2NH, accepted this post.

All Region 1 member societies are urgently requested to send all relevant information such as
(updates on) the national frequency allocations to the Amateur (Satellite) Service in the bands above
50 MHz
approaches to the national authorities and results of discussions with the national authorities on the
subject of frequency allocations above 50 MHz to the IARU Region 1 VHF/UHF/Microwaves
Frequency Allocation Coordinator. His address is given on page If of this handbook.

Note. The recommendation of Committee B adopted by the final Plenary Session of the IARU Region 1
Conference in Noordwijkerhout (April 1987) contained the following statement:
It is intended that copies of the results of the survey of Region 1 VHF/UHF/Microwaves frequency
allocations be supplied to Regions 2 and 3 of IARU with a request for similar information, so that
world-wide co-ordination can be obtained, especially with regard to satellite and EME
communication.
The Plenary Session agreed with this suggestion, stipulating that this should be done via the IARU Region
1 Secretariat.

At the IARU Region 1 Conference in Torremolinos (April 1990) Resolution 89-2, proposed by the
Administrative Council and concerning the desirability of common frequency allocations on
VHF/UHF/Microwaves in view of international working using modes such as moonbounce, meteor scatter
etc., was adopted with a slight change in the wording. As ratified by Region 1 the recommendation reads
as follows:
Member societies should work to establish and/or maintain common frequency allocations for the
Amateur Service and the Amateur Satellite Service to enable international working and facilitate
bandplanning. Resolution 89-2 was drafted by the Administrative Council at its meeting in Orlando,
September 1989, and, obviously, fits in seamlessly with the work already started by IARU Region at
the Noordwijkerhout Conference (April 1987).

Database keeper
The work of the propagation coordinators very much being dependant of the availability of data from
amateur observations, the VHF/UHF/MW Committee at its meeting in Lillehammer 1999 decided that a
common database, easily accessible for amateurs and organized in such a form that data analysis would
be made relatively easy, should be set up.
The person responsible for setting up and maintaining this database will work in close cooperation with the
propagation coordinators. The access to the database and the required information will be published in the
Region 1 Newsletter, the Region 1 VHF Newsletter and the Internet

VHF Handbook 9.00 150/180


IARU-R1
BEACONS
IARU R-1 VHF and µWave beacon list (deleted in Landshut 17)
This list of VHF/UHF Beacons is compiled for IARU Region 1 by G0RDI, and it builds upon the valuable
work contributed by G3UUT. Many thanks to the VHF/UHF/ Microwave managers of radio societies across
Region 1, beacon keepers, beacon coordinators and VHF/UHF DXers too numerous to mention.

The main Region 2 & 3 6m beacons are included in the list in italics for completeness. Thanks to G3USF,
the IARU HF beacon coordinator for these. All inputs are welcome and should be sent to the address
below.
You are free to use information from this beacon list but please acknowledge IARU Region 1 and
G0RDI.
Iain Philipps G0RDI
IARU Region 1 VHF Beacon Coordinator
24 Acres End
Amersham
Buckinghamshire HP7 9DZ England
Email: g0rdi@77hz.com
Phone: +44 1494 432144

VHF Handbook 9.00 151/180


IARU-R1
BANDPLANNING
Historical data
Attention is drawn to the "Principles of Bandplanning"(see PART 2 section 1)
At the IARU Region 1 Conference in Cefalu (1984) a 50 MHz bandplan was adopted for use in countries
within the European part of Region 1 where amateurs had obtained a frequency allocation or assignment
in the 50 MHz band. As an appreciable number of countries within the European part of Region 1 had
obtained or expected to obtain such an allocation by the end of 1989, at the IARU Region 1 Conference in
Torremolinos (1990) the first version of an official IARU Region 1 bandplan for use in that part of Region 1
where the 50 MHz allocation does not exceed 52.000 MHz was adopted.

At the IARU Region 1 Conference in Tel Aviv (1996) the bandplan was slightly amended in order to reflect
practical experiences. The IARU Region-1 conference in Sun City (2011) further revised this.

At the IARU Region 1 Conference in San Marino (2002) it appeared that a significant number of DXCC
countries ( e.g. EI, G, GD, GI, GJ, GM, GU, GW, S5, ZB, ZS, 5B4, ZC4 ) had got access to the
70 MHz band and it was decided to add the bandplan for that band.

Regarding amateur-satellite bandplans, the following was decided at the IARU Region 1 Conference in
Warsaw (1975):
That IARU Region 1 adopts the bandplans recommended by the sponsors of each satellite system,
e.g. by AMSAT for OSCAR-7, but also informs sponsors that such bandplans must be kept simple
and that in the opinion of IARU Region 1 in each case provisions should be made to segregate
Telegraphy from telephony.

The currently valid satellite bands, together with some data on amateur satellites, can be found in the
amateur satellite chapter.

The appearance of manned space stations with an amateur station on board has led to the allocation of
FM channel frequencies. In Vienna 1995 the former 145.200/145.800 MHz frequency pair was allocated.
The following general recommendations regarding the promotion of bandplans have been
adopted/re-affirmed at various IARU Region 1 Conferences:
• VHF Managers should give maximum publicity to the adopted bandplans. In view of the many
newcomers, regular repetition of the publication of the bandplans is advisable.
• Member Societies, and particularly their VHF Managers or VHF Committees, should strongly
promote adherence to the adopted bandplans by all VHF/UHF/Microwaves amateurs in their
country.
It will be noted in the following bandplans that the accommodation of the narrow-band modes in several
bands is quite similar and is modelled after the plans for the 145 MHz band which existed before the 1996
Tel Aviv conference.

The narrow-band modes parts of the higher bands are respectively:


• 432 - 434 MHz
• 1296 - 1298 MHz
• 2320 - 2322 MHz alternative 2304 - 2306 or 2308- 2310 MHz
• 3400 - 3402 MHz
• 5668 - 5670 MHz
• 5760 - 5762 MHz
• 10368 - 10370 MHz alternative 10450 - 10452 MHz
• 24048 - 24050 MHz
• 24192 - 24194 MHz till 31-12-2003 ( San Marino 2002 )

VHF Handbook 9.00 152/180


IARU-R1
• 47.000 - 47.002 GHz
• 75.500 - 76.000 GHz (DAVOS 2005)
• 77.500 - 77.501 GHz
• 122.250 - 122.251 GHz
• 134.000 - 134.001 GHz
• 248.000 - 248.001 GHz
Note: As it cannot be expected that FM repeater systems will become operational at the microwave bands
above 77 GHz the NB segment in those bands is currently limited to 1 MHz .

At the Conference in San Marino it was decided to change the basic set-up of the bandplan.
Till then the bandplans show two columns (plus a column for the frequency segments):
IARU Region 1 bandplan Usage

The left column designation is self-explanatory. The right column contains meeting/calling frequencies,
agreed upon for the convenience of the VHF/UHF/Microwave amateurs practising specific modes of
communication. These frequencies are not part of the adopted IARU Region 1 bandplan and, though in the
normal amateur spirit other operators should take notice of these agreements, no right on reserved
frequencies can be derived from a mention in the right-hand column.
The San Marino conference started to change this, beginning with the 50 MHz and 145 MHz bands. The
other bands to follow at a later moment. In this new planning there are three columns:
maximum bandwidth Mode Usage

The maximum bandwidth determines the maximum spectral width ( -6 dB points) of all emissions allowed
in a segment.
The mode indicates the modulation methods ( e.g. telegraphy, telephony, MGM, etc) allowed in a
segment. M(achine) G(enerated) M(ode) indicates those transmission modes relying fully on computer
processing such as RTTY, AMTOR, PSK31, FSK441 and the like.
The usage column indicates the main usage (sometimes country dependant) of a segment. In case only
one application is allowed, the word ‘exclusive’ is added.

The allocation of frequency segments to the various modes of operation in the IARU Region 1 bandplans
is subject to the following condition:
The allocation of sub-bands in the IARU Region 1 bandplans allows the indicated category of users to
employ any frequency within that sub-band, provided that no appreciable energy falls outside that
sub-band. Users must therefore take into account the bandwidth of their sidebands when selecting an
operating frequency. (de Haan, 1993)

Deleted during the Landshut conference (2017)


50 MHz
We removed:
This band plan, first adopted at the IARU Region 1 Conference in Torremolinos (1990) and revised at the
1996 Tel Aviv conference, the 2002 San Marino Conference, and the 2011 Sun City Conference is
recommended for use in those countries in the European part of Region 1 which allow amateurs to operate
in this part of the radio spectrum. In many countries in the African part of Region 1 (see footnotes
accompanying the ITU frequency allocation table) the 50 - 54 MHz band is allocated to the Amateur Service
on a primary basis. These Countries may refer to the SARL Bandplan.
144 MHz
Following footnotes were deleted, because they went obsolete:
g. Attention is drawn to section 1.1. point iii of these Bandplan notes!

VHF Handbook 9.00 153/180


IARU-R1
h. Unmanned packet radio stations and digital access points are allowed in the segment
144.800 -144.9625 MHz, provided they are fully compatible with 12.5kHz channel spacing. Any other
unmanned packet radio outside of this frequency range must cease operation.
i. Except in the part of the band allocated to the Amateur Satellite Service and the linear
transponders it is not allowed to use input or output frequencies in the 145 MHz band for repeaters
with in or output in other amateur bands (Miskolc Tapolca 1978, San Marino 2002).
432 MHz
The words, ‘centre frequency of’ and ‘horizontal polarization’ be removed to allow broadband digital
experiments of footnote “m” are deleted

Deleted during the Virtual conference (2020)

DATV & SATV in the 435 MHz Band (Varna 2014)


As the national 70cm allocations vary considerably, it is not possible in the VHF Handbook to specify exact
centre frequencies for DATV/SATV operation – but it should be where its bandwidth is compatible with
other uses.
If the 435-438MHz amateur satellite section is used for ATV, it shall be on the following basis:
• ATV (like Voice) Repeater outputs are not permitted
• ATV Internet gateways are not permitted
• ATV Repeater inputs are permitted (eg for cross band usage)
• ATV Simplex usage is permitted
• Transmission times by ATV users should be as short as possible
Any usage should also be compliant with the Region 1 Technical Recommendations for DATV/SATV and
in particular the maximum bandwidth.
Centre frequencies of ATV usage in the amateur satellite section shall be chosen to place its bandwidth at
the upper end of the amateur satellite section

Footnotes 430 Mhz band


c. Telegraphy is permitted over the whole narrow-band DX part of the band; Telegraphy exclusive
between 432.000 - 432.100 MH. PSK31, however, can be used as well in this segment(VGC2020)
d. ATV operators should be encouraged to use the microwave allocations where available, but may
continue to use the 435 MHz band. In case of interference between ATV and the Amateur Satellite
Service, the Satellite Service shall have priority.
Any remaining legacy wideband ATV usage in the 435MHz band should be phased out in favour of
narrower bandwidth, more compatible, modes such as DATV or SATV
For ATV transmissions National societies should provide guidance to their members on the exact
frequencies to be used, with due consideration of the interests of other users (Varna 2014)

VHF Handbook 9.00 154/180


IARU-R1
CONTESTING
Deleted during the Landshut Conference 2017
History
To stimulate activity on all VHF/UHF/Microwave bands, sub-regional contests, organised and judged by
national societies, have been held since 1956. In many countries these contests have developed into
national annual Trophy competitions.
The rules for the national contests are up to the national society which organises the contests. They may
use the IARU Region 1 contest rules or design their own rules, deviating for instance in the manner of
scoring etc.
However, experience has shown that a certain amount of international coordination is required, and hence
the following rulings were adopted at various IARU Region 1 Conferences.

Organisation
IARU Region 1 has organised official international contests on the VHF/UHF/Microwaves bands since
1956, when an all-band contest during the first weekend of September was established.

In 1962 a separate UHF/Microwaves contest was added, which was initially held during the last weekend
of May (decision Turin, 1961). From 1970 onwards this date was set at the first weekend of October
(Brussels, 1969). The millimetre group was introduced during the meeting of the VHF Working Group in
Vienna, March1986, with the aim of promoting the use of these Amateur Service bands. In October 1987
this extended rule was applied for the first time.
As of 1970 an SWL contest was established, to be run concurrently with the official Region 1 VHF and
UHF/Microwaves contests. The conference in DAVOS (2005) decided to discontinue the Region 1
VHF/UHF/Microwaves SWL contest.
During the IARU Region 1 Conference in Scheveningen (1972) it was decided that as of 1973 the
September contest would only be held on 145 MHz.
At the IARU Region 1 Conference in Noordwijkerhout (1987) an IARU Region 1 ATV contest was added,
to be held during the second weekend of September.
Finally, at the IARU Region 1 Conference in De Haan (1993) an official 50 MHz contest was established,
to be held as from 1994 during the first weekend of June. In San Marino 2002 the date was changed into
the third weekend of June.

Hence, currently four official IARU Region 1 contests are organised annually:
• The 50 MHz and 70 MHz (Varna 2014) contest during the third weekend of June.
• The VHF contest during the first weekend of September - only on 145 MHz;
• The UHF/Microwaves contest during the first weekend of October on 435 MHz and higher bands;
• The ATV contest during the second weekend of June;

Member societies of IARU Region 1 organise and judge the results of the above contests. The procedures
for the organisation of the 50MHz, 145MHz and UHF/Microwaves contests are set out in chapter 3. The list
of the organizing societies can be found in Annex 1

The IARU Region 1 ATV contest is organized and judged by a member society in a country where ATV
transmissions are authorized.

The rules for the official Region 1 contests are set out in PART 1 chapter 2 (50MHz, 145MHz, UHF,
Microwaves), and chapter 3 (ATV).

Attention is drawn to the fact that since 1974 during the first weekend of November the Italian member
society ARI organises the Marconi-Memorial Telegraphy contest as an international contest for the whole

VHF Handbook 9.00 155/180


IARU-R1
of Region 1. This contest, run according to the rules of the official Region 1 contests, is judged by the ARI
VHF Committee, and the results are distributed to all participating countries via the VHF Managers of the
member societies. This ARI contest replaces the former IARU Region 1 Telegraphy contest.

Financing the contest robot (deleted during VGC 2020)


DL3MBG on behalf of DARC and OE1MCU on behalf of ÖVSV are taking over the responsibility and
financing for the Contest-Robot in line with the VHF-Handbook and the CWG under the guidance of C5.
This Contest-Robot will be shared with all Member Societies when the Contest-Robot has accomplished
an appropriate maturity.

Procedure
Untill 2016 all contests were organised in the following procedure.
Information
In January of each year the Chairman of the VHF/UHF/Microwaves Committee shall send a letter to the
societies organising the IARU Region 1 VHF, UHF/Microwaves, 50/70 MHz and ATV contests in that year,
containing an up-to-date copy of the rules for these contests.

Organisation
The IARU-R1 contest robot will be used for contest evaluation for all CW/phone contests. The contest
robot is not used for ATV contests. (Vienna 2016)
The logs should be submitted either to:
• National robot or VHF Manager or to the properly nominated Contest Committee
• Uploaded directly to IARU R1 contest robot in case there is no national possibility (method a.
above).
• The final evaluation is the responsibility of the organizing society. (Varna 2014)

Timing
• The VHF Manager or the properly nominated Contest Committee should upload the logs to the
IARU R1 robot no later than second Sunday after the contest.
• Preliminary cross checked results shall be published not later than third Sunday after the contest.
• Not later than the fifth Sunday after the contest the national VHF Manager or properly nominated
Contest Committee shall validate the entrants of their own society.
• Stations operating temporarily outside their “home-country” are for the purpose of the contest
participating as stations in the country where they operate.
• The organising society will publish the final results not later than fourteenth Sunday after the
contest on IARU R1 robot web site.
The list of results should include at least the following data: call sign, Locator, score, number of
QSOs, number of deleted QSOs, percentage of deleted points, ODX call sign, ODX Locator and
ODX QRB.
Number of unique QSOs for every contest entrant should be included in the published contest
results.
• These results shall also be published in electronic format at least on the IARU R1 web page.
• The entrants scoring highest in each section will be awarded the IARU REGION 1 AWARD. The
organising society will receive the certificates from the chairman of the C5 committee (signed by
the R1 secretary) and will send those after having filled in the relevant data and after signature to
the winners in each section.
Certificates for all participants will be provided by mail directly from the contest robot. (Varna 2014)
• The DARC will host the ceremony during the yearly HAM radio in Friedrichshafen for the first 3
stations in each category. The prices will be sponsored by the organizing society. (Vienna 16)

VHF Handbook 9.00 156/180


IARU-R1
Flow chart contest evaluation

VHF Handbook 9.00 157/180


IARU-R1
Rules
All-band sub-regional contests
At the IARU Conference in Folkestone (1961) it was agreed that during sub-regional contests code
numbers and Locator should be exchanged according to the rules for IARU Region 1
VHF/UHF/Microwaves contests.
In view of the rather different contest conditions in the various parts of Region 1 the following minimum
co-ordination, adopted at the Region 1 Conference in Malmö (1963) and later slightly amended at the
Scheveningen Conference (1972) and the Brighton Conference (1981) has been agreed:
• All sub-regional contests will be held between 14.00 UTC on Saturday and 14.00 UTC on Sunday.
• All VHF/UHF/Microwaves Field Days, organised within Region 1, shall coincide as to dates and
time limits with sub-regional or official IARU Region 1 contests. At the San Marino 2002 conference
it was agreed to recommend that such field days should coincide with the IARU Region1
VHF/UHF/Microwave contest in July.

At the IARU Region 1 Conference in Brussels (1969) it was agreed that the sub-regional contest during the
first weekend of November shall be a Telegraphy contest, run according to the rules of the official Region 1
contests. Since 1974 ARI has organised the Marconi Memorial Telegraphy contest during this weekend
and has invited all Region 1 amateurs to participate.
Furthermore, at the IARU Region 1 Conference in Cefalu (1984) it was agreed that
• Sub-regional contests on the coordinated dates shall be all-band events, 145 MHz through 240
GHz.

On this basis in many countries member societies of IARU Region 1 organise national contests during the
first weekends of March, May, July, September, October and November, whereby the September and
October national contests are run concurrently with the IARU Region 1 contests on these weekends.

In view of the fact that in an appreciable number of countries the 50 MHz band had become available to
the Amateur Service, the meeting of the IARU Region 1 VHF/UHF/Microwaves Committee in Vienna,
March 1992, adopted the following recommendation:
• From 1993 national societies are encouraged to establish 50 MHz sections in the sub-regional
contests.
This recommendation was approved by the Executive Committee of Region 1 at their meeting in April
1992, and ratified by the 1993 IARU Region 1 Conference.

National VHF Managers or properly nominated Contest Committees should send the electronic contest log
data entries from IARU R1 contests to a special web page to allow an exchange of logs for more accurate
national evaluation. (Cavtat 2008). At present time http://hamradio.pl/sp7njx/index.php is in use.

Microwave contest
At the IARU Region 1 Conference in Scheveningen (1972) it was agreed that National societies shall
organise sub-regional contests on the microwave (1.3 GHz and higher) bands during the third weekend of
June.

At the IARU Region 1 Conference in Noordwijkerhout (1987) it was decided that from 1988 onwards the
sub-regional microwave contests will take place on the first weekend of June.

During the IARU Region 1 Conference in Landshut(2017) it was decided that the 3.4 GHz band will be
accepted as a contest band.

VHF Handbook 9.00 158/180


IARU-R1
Experiment with scoring system: Locator bonuses
On the subject of scoring at the IARU Region 1 Conference in Noordwijkerhout the following
recommendation was adopted:
• Societies are encouraged to try out a system of locator bonuses, such as proposed by EDR, in their
national VHF/UHF/Microwaves contests.

Introduction of locator bonus in contests


From the EDR proposal, document NN 100 amended, submitted to the IARU Region 1 Conference at
Noordwijkerhout (1987):
To encourage participants in the regional and sub-regional contests to turn their antenna towards
less-populated areas, EDR proposes the introduction of a Locator-Bonus in the contest rules. For
several years this principle has, with success, been in use in Scandinavia.

If the Locator-Bonus is used, we expect to see growing activities in the "outskirts" of Europe, where it is
low, dying or completely dead now. This is due to the fact that contest activity in central Europe is so high
nowadays, that any good station can work "local" stations for most of the contest period. Only during the
night there appears to be time to work "DX" to the remote areas.
Currently these remote stations, when participating in the contests, only work a limited number of stations
during the first hours of a contest and thereafter quickly go QRT.
If the "remote" stations would get more attention by being more "attractive" (bonus points), they will,
undoubtedly, also become more active and we may expect a positive development in the contest activity.
After discussion in Committee B it was decided to recommend that this system be tried out in national
contests.
The following bonus system was mentioned as a starting point for the experiments:
For each new locator square worked
• on the 145 MHz and 435 MHz bands: 1000 points
• on the microwave bands: 300 points

Information exchange on contests


To ensure that participants in the various contests will know on which times or time intervals they may
expect activity in other countries on the bands, at the Conference in Malmö (1963) and at later
Conferences the importance of exchanging information on contests was stressed. At the IARU Region 1
Conference in Warsaw (1975) the following recommendation was adopted:
In order to promote greater uniformity in the timing (and perhaps style) of Region 1
VHF/UHF/MICROWAVES contests, all member societies are invited to send well in advance of the
contest dates, say annually, details of their contest calendar - dates and times - in English to the
Hon. Secretary of Region 1 for publication in Region 1 News and for forwarding to all VHF Managers
for information.
The Hon. Secretary of Region 1 has requested to send this information to the Region 1 Secretariat
not later than the 31st December of each year.

VHF Handbook 9.00 159/180


IARU-R1
VHF/UHF/µWave Challenge trophies and medals: history and
winners
Till 1989 the rules for the official IARU Region 1 contests stated that the participants in the IARU Region
VHF/UHF/Microwaves contests competed for four Challenge Trophies. These Trophies had come into
existence and were awarded in the following manner.
IARU Region 1 contests have always been run with two categories of stations on each band. At the VHF
Working Group meeting in The Hague in 1959 these two groups were defined as follows :
• section 1
1. Home stations fixed
2. Genuine alternative address stations
• section 2
1. Portable stations fixed (using the mains)
2. Portables and mobiles independent of the mains

At the same meeting in The Hague, through the good offices of VERON, the IARU Region 1 VHF trophy
was donated by NEAL Crystals Ltd. At that time the only Region 1 contest was an all-band event held
during the first weekend of September. It was decided that as of 1959 the Trophy would be awarded to the
highest scorer on 145 MHz in this contest, irrespective of the category (section).

As could be expected, in most cases this was a station competing in the portable category, section 2. To
remedy this situation, at the Region 1 Conference in Folkestone (1961) PZK donated the PZK Trophy, to
be awarded to the station in the other category (section) on 145 MHz from 1961 onwards.

The awarding procedure could, of course, lead to a switching of the Trophies between sections, depending
on whether a home or a portable station had scored highest. Hence, in order to simplify matters, as of
1966 the Region 1 VHF Trophy has been awarded to the winner in section 1 and the PZK Trophy to the
winner in section 2 on 145 MHz.

When in 1973, at the VHF Working Group meeting in Baunatal, it was decided to organise the Region 1
September contest only on 145 MHz, nothing had to be changed in the awarding of the Trophies.

At the Region 1 Conference in Malmö (1963) I1XD, VHF Manager of ARI, offered the Vittoria Alata Cup
to be awarded to the highest scorer in the Region 1 UHF/Microwaves contest, irrespective of the section
the winner would compete in. In 1966, at the Conference in Opatija, I1XD donated a second Vittoria
Alata Cup, and as of that year the Vittoria Alata Cup I has been awarded to the winner in section 1 on
435 MHz, and the Vittoria Alata Cup II to the winner in section 2 on 435 MHz.

At the Region 1 Conference in Scheveningen (1972) a recommendation was adopted to establish as of


1973 overall UHF/Microwaves contest winners in each station category (section) with the aid of a multiplier
system for points made on the various bands. It was decided to maintain the system established for
awarding the Challenge Trophies, and to award IARU Region 1 medals to the overall UHF/Microwaves
contest winners.
Later it appeared to be more practical to award a IARU REGION 1 CERTIFICATE to those winners. Those
certificates will be provided by the chairman of the VHF/UHF/Microwaves committee to the adjucating
society for signature and distribution to the winners.

At the IARU Region 1 Conference in Miskolc-Tapolca (1978) the station categories (sections) were
changed to
• section 1: stations operated by a single operator, with no assistance during the contest, using
privately owned equipment and antennas and operating from any location
• section 2: all other entrants

VHF Handbook 9.00 160/180


IARU-R1

The system for awarding the Trophies to the winners in the various sections in the 144 MHz and the 435
MHz bands was maintained.

At the IARU Region 1 Conference in Torremolinos (April 1990) the Chairman of the
VHF/UHF/Microwaves Committee had to announce that diligent efforts to trace the whereabouts of these
Trophies has met with no success.
During the last decades the Trophies had never been sent to the winners, as in the past difficulties had
been experienced with custom duties etc., but the winners only received a special certificate. The IARU
Region 1 Trophy and the PZK Trophy were probably retained by early winners, though this is by no means
sure. The Vittoria Alata Cups have always been in the possession of I1XD, ( who did send the winners a
photograph of the cup with the call-sign engraved ) but could not be found by his family after his demise.

At the IARU Region 1 Conference in Torremolinos (April 1990) it was decided to remove the Challenge
Trophies from the contest rules. In case new Trophies would be donated, it was agreed that these would
be retained at the IARU Region 1 Secretariat, and that only special certificates with pictures of the donated
Trophies would be sent to the various winners.

VHF Handbook 9.00 161/180


IARU-R1
Rules until 2017
Definitions
5.7.1.1 Station:
set of antennas, transmitters and receivers used during the contest on each frequency band (i.e. multiband
setups are composed of multiple stations).
5.7.1.2 Location:
geographical area with diameter of no more than 500 meters where the station resides during the contest.
5.7.1.3 Call Sign:
identification of the station during the contest. Added prefix and/or suffix do not generate different call sign
(i.e. S50AAA/p or DL/S50AAA are the same call sign as S50AAA).
5.7.1.4 • Operator:
an individual that operates the station during the contest using the station’s call sign. Operator may reside
inside (local operator) or outside (remote operator) the location. During the contest, an operator may
operate only stations that form one entry.
5.7.1.5 Multi operator:
stations from the same location, operated by more than one operator and using one callsign on all bands.
5.7.1.6 Single operator:
stations from the same location, operated by a single operator and using one callsign on all bands, with no
operational assistance of another person during the contest.

Eligible entrants (2017)


All licensed radio amateurs in Region 1 may participate in the contest. Multiple operator entries will be
accepted, provided only one callsign per band is used during the contest. When such stations use a
different call sign on each band, the logs of that Multi-operator entry shall for each band clearly bear an
indication of the group. This will preferably be one of the call signs used, but a group name may be used
instead. All stations belonging to such a group shall operate from the same location. A Station operated by
more than one operator and using the same call sign on different frequency bands is eligible for MULTI
section only.(Varna 2014)

The contestants must operate within the letter and spirit of the contest and at no greater power than permitted
in the ordinary licenses of their country. Stations operating under special high power licenses do so "hors
concours" and cannot be placed in the contest proper.
Contest sections
The contests shall comprise the following sections for each band from 50 MHz to 10 GHz and for the
Millimetre group (the combined group of amateur bands above 10 GHz):
• Section SINGLE: stations operated by a single operator, with no operational assistance of another
person during the contest.
• Section MULTI: stations operated by multiple operators
• Section SINGLE – LOW POWER: stations operated by a single operator, with no operational
assistance of another person during the contest, transmitting with less than 100 W PEP and using
single directional antenna (with only one radiating element - i.e. 9 element Yagi or 4 element loop) for
transmit and receive (144 MHz only).
• Section MULTI – LOW POWER: stations operated by multiple operators transmitting with less than
100 W PEP and using single directional antenna (with only one radiating element - i.e. 9 element Yagi
or 4 element loop) for transmit and receive (144 MHz only).
• Section 6 HOURS SINGLE: stations operated by a single operator, with no operational assistance of
another person during the contest (144 MHz and 432 MHz only).
• Section 6 HOURS MULTI: stations operated by a multiple operators (144 MHz and 432 MHz only).

VHF Handbook 9.00 162/180


IARU-R1
• Section SINGLE without MGM: stations operated by a single operator, with no operational
assistance of another person during the contest (50 MHz and 70 MHz only).
• Section SINGLE with MGM: stations operated by a single operator, with no operational assistance of
another person during the contest on (50 MHz and 70 MHz only).
• Section MULTI without MGM: stations operated by a multiple operators (50 MHz and 70 MHz only).
• Section MULTI with MGM: stations operated by a multiple operators (50 MHz and 70 MHz only).
From 2017 until 2020:
Contest sections
50/70 MHz Contest:
The 50 MHz and 70 MHz contests are held on separate weekends. The contest working group is asked to
find appropriate dates (VGC 2020)
The contests shall comprise the following sections for:
• 50 MHz band:
o SINGLE (SO): single operator entries without MGM (only CW/SSB)
o MULTI (MO): multi operator entries without MGM (only CW/SSB)
o SINGLE (SO-MGM): single operator entries MGM on another date
o MULTI (MO-MGM): multi operator entries MGM on another date
o 6HOURS (6H): 6 hours entries (CW/SSB)
• 70 MHz band:
o SINGLE (SO): single operator entries without MGM (only CW/SSB)
o MULTI (MO): multi operator entries without MGM (only CW/SSB)
o SINGLE (SO-MGM): single operator entries MGM
o MULTI (MO-MGM): multi operator entries MGM
145 MHz contest:
• SINGLE (SO): single operator entries.
• MULTI (MO): multi operator entries.
• SINGLE LOW POWER (SO-LP): single operator low power entries.
• MULTI LOW POWER (MO-LP): multi operator low power entries.
• 6HOURS (6H): 6 hours entries.

UHF/Microwaves Contest:
The contests shall comprise the following sections for:
• 435 MHz band:
o SINGLE (SO): single operator entries.
o MULTI (MO): multi operator entries.
o SINGLE LOW POWER (SO-LP): single operator low power entries.
o MULTI LOW POWER (MO-LP): multi operator low power entries.
o 6HOURS (6H): 6 hours entries.
• 1.3 GHz, 2.4 GHz, 3.4 GHz, 5.7 GHz, 10 GHz bands and for the Millimetre group (the combined
group of amateur bands above 10 GHz):
o SINGLE (SO): single operator entries.
o MULTI (MO): multi operator entries.

6 HOURS section time rule:


the 6 hour time segment can be divided into maximum two periods. The time of the first QSO sets the start
time of the first period. The pause between the two periods must be longer than 2 hours. The first time
difference of 2 hours or more between two consecutive QSOs marks the pause segment. Only the QSOs
that fall into the combined 6 hour time segment will be counted for points. (Varna 2014)

VHF Handbook 9.00 163/180


IARU-R1

Participants are welcome to operate longer than 6 hours and in such case they shall send their complete
log (the contest robot will automatically extract the 6 hours part from the log, while the rest of the log
entries will be used for cross-checking purposes). (Vienna 2016).
Operating
• No more than one transmitter per band may be in use at any one time.
• A participating station must operate from the same location throughout the event.
• All the equipment of the station (transmitters, receivers and antennas, etc) must be located within a
single circle of no greater than 500 metres diameter.

The operator may reside outside the station’s area (“remote station”), connected to the station via a “remote
control terminal”. In such a case, the Locator for the contest is the Locator of the station’s position. An
operator may only operate one single station, regardless if it is locally or remotely operated, during the same
event.
Date of contests
• The 50/70 MHz contest will begin on the third Saturday of June.
• The 145 MHz contest will start on the first Saturday of September.
• The UHF/Microwave contest will start on the first Saturday of October.

Duration of contests
The contest will commence at 1400 hours UTC on the Saturday and end at 1400 hours UTC on the
Sunday.

Contacts
Each station may only be worked once per band, whether it is fixed, portable or mobile. If a station is
worked again during the same contest on the same band, only one contact may count for points, but any
duplicate contacts should be logged without claim for points and clearly marked as duplicates.
Contacts made via active repeaters and EME contacts do not count for points.
Competitors are obliged to follow the common definition for a valid QSO (described in the PART 1 section
4.1). The contest exchange (call, report, QSO number and locator) shall be sent and confirmed on the
band where the contact started and only during the QSO. No attempt should be made during the QSO to
obtain any part of the required exchange information via other communication methods such as the
Internet chat channel, DX Cluster, talk-back on another amateur band, telephone etc.. Such a secondary
method invalidates the contest QSO. Self-spotting (advertising its own frequency) on any other
communication means, like DX Cluster, chat rooms, etc. shall not be used during the contest. (Varna
2014)

Acceptable examples when using a secondary method:


• "Shall we make a sked on 144.388?"
• "I have QRM, let's move to 144.218 kHz and start again"
• "Nothing received, please try again" and the QSO starts again
• "Thank you for a nice QSO" - Note: Only after the QSO has completed on the radio!

Unacceptable examples when using a secondary method:


• "I need your serial number"
• "Please repeat all information"
• “Please confirm <report>, <serial number>, <locator> etc.”

VHF Handbook 9.00 164/180


IARU-R1
Type of emission
Contacts may be made in A1A, J3E or F3E (G3E). MGM mode is allowed during the 50/70 MHz
contest.(Varna 2014)

Contest exchanges
Code numbers exchanged during each contact shall consist of the RS, RST or RSQ(MGM mode) report,
followed by a serial number commencing with 001 for the first contact on each band and increasing by one
for each successive contact on that band. This exchange must immediately be followed by the complete
Locator of the sending station (examples: 59003 JO20DB or 579123 IN55CC).
For contact on 50 MHz, outside of Region 1, the locator can be 4 digits and “MM” will be added as 5th and
6th digit. (Vienna 2016)
Note: for the “T” part of the report, PART 3 section 2.1.2. For the “Q” part of the report, see PART 3
section 2.2
Until 2020:
Contest exchanges
Code numbers exchanged during each contact shall consist of the RS, RST or RSQ (MGM mode) report,
followed by a serial number commencing with 001 for the first contact on each band and increasing by one
for each successive contact on that band. This exchange must immediately be followed by the complete
locator of the sending station (examples: 59003 JO20DB or 579123 IN55CC).

All times must be logged in UTC.

Call signs logged must be the same as those exchanged over the air by the entrants during the QSO.

For contacts on 50 MHz, outside of Region 1, the received locator can be 4 digits and “MM” will be added
as 5th and 6th digit.

Correction of logged exchanges after the contest, by use of any database, recordings, email or other
method, is not allowed.

Scoring
For the amateur bands up to 10 GHz inclusive, points will be scored on the basis of one point per
kilometre, i.e. the calculated distance in kilometres will be truncated to an integer value and 1 km will be
added.
The centre of each locator square is used for distance calculations.
In case that only a 4-character locator has been received, the contact is invalid; except (50 MHz outside
Region 1, see 2.9)
In order to make contest scores comparable, for the conversion from degrees to kilometres a factor of 111.2
should be used when calculating distances with the aid of the spherical geometry equation (Noordwijkerhout,
1987).
All QSOs including unique QSOs shall count for points even if they only appear in the log of one contest
entrant (Varna 2014)
For the combined higher bands (Millimetre group) the score will be the sum of the points scored on each of
the bands, using the following multiplication factors for the number of kilometres scored on each band:
• 24 GHz 1x
• 47 GHz 2x
• 75/80 GHz 3x
• 122 GHz 4x
• 134 GHz 8x

VHF Handbook 9.00 165/180


IARU-R1
• 245 GHz 10 x

Entries
The entries must be set out in digital/electronic form fulfilling the requirements under rule 5.3.13. Logs shall
be sent according to rule 5.2.3 not later than the second Monday following the contest weekend. Late
entries will be accepted as check logs. By submitting the contest or check log, an entrant agrees that he /
she has:
• understood the contest rules and agrees to be bound by them,
• operated according to all the rules and regulations that pertain to his and/or station license,
• agreed the cross-checked log may be made open to the public, except for the personal data in PAdr1,
PAdr2, RName, RAdr1, RAdr2, RPoCo, RCity, RCoun, RPhon and RHBBS lines of EDI file format,
• accept all decisions of the organizing society (contest organizer) as final.
(Vienna 2016)

Judging of entries
The final judging of the entries shall be the responsibility of the organising society, whose decision shall be
final. Entrants deliberately contravening any of these rules, attempting fraud or flagrantly disregarding the
IARU Region 1 bandplans shall be disqualified.
Each VHF Manager and/or national Contest Committee shall be responsible for monitoring during
contests. Additional monitoring stations may be appointedThe national VHF Manager/Contest Committee
is responsible for disqualification based upon the results of monitoring. The claimed contact shall be
disqualified for any error in the information logged by the station.
Any error in the exchanged information logged by a station is liable to result in the loss of all points for that
contact, subject to review and confirmation by the contest organiser.

The final judging of the entries shall be the responsibility of the organising society, whose decision shall be
final. Entrants deliberately contravening any of these rules, attempting fraud or flagrantly is regarding the
IARU Region 1 band plans shall be disqualified.
Each VHF Manager and/or national Contest Committee can propose to the contest organizer
disqualification or penalization of an entrant. The claimed contact shall be disqualified for any error in the
information logged by the station.
Any error in the exchanged information logged by a station is liable to result in the loss of all points for that
contact, subject to review and confirmation by the contest organiser.
The claimed contact shall be disqualified for any error in the information logged by the station. When there
is high evidence that the error is due to the wrongly logged information of the transmitting station (i.e.
wrong date/time or call/UL) such a LOG shall not be used for adjudication purposes.

Use of secondary means


If an entrant will attempt to complete a QSO with a secondary method (as Internet chat channel, DX
Cluster, talk-back on another amateur band, telephone, etc.), or improperly use any means for self-spotting
he will receive from the C5 Contesting WG a Yellow Card.
The list of stations that receive Yellow Cards will be published at the end of the Final Classification.
An entrant or operator receiving two yellow cards over three consecutive IARU Region 1 contests (50 -
70/VHF/USHF) will be disqualified. If the entrant is in a multi-operator category, all listed operators are so
affected.
C5 Contesting WG will be responsible for these actions; every National VHF Contest Manager could
suggest such penalizations.

Awards
• Section winners:

VHF Handbook 9.00 166/180


IARU-R1
Certificates will be issued by the organising society to the winners in the two sections on each band
up to 10 GHz and for the Millimetre group.
• Overall winners for UHF/Microwave contest:
For each section an overall winner of the IARU Region 1 UHF/Microwaves contest will be declared.
For this competition the scores of the entrants on the following bands will be combined, using an
adaptive multiplier system:
1. 435 MHz
2. 1.3 GHz
3. 2.4 GHz
4. 3.4 GHz (Landshut 2017)
5. 5.7 GHz
6. 10 GHz
7. Millimetre group
The multipliers to be used for the determination of the overall scores in each section are found as follows:
• The multiplier is equal to the ratio between the highest number of points scored by any participating
station on the 435 MHz band for that section and the highest number of points scored by any
participating station on the band for that section for which the multiplier is being determined.
• For the millimetre group the scores as determined according to rule 2.10 are used for the
determination of this group's multiplier.
• As the 3.4 GHz band is not yet available in all countries within Region 1, the 3.4 GHz results will
not be taken into account when determining the overall winners of the sections in the October IARU
Region 1 UHF/Microwaves contest (Noordwijkerhout 1987 )

Logs
The logs shall be in the format defined in PART 3 Section 5
Please visit also the IARU Contest robot: iaru.oevsv.at

What needs to be logged?


In VHF contests the following needs to be received over the air and logged accurately by both parties to a
contest exchange:
• both calls
• report
• serial number
• locator

MGM Contest exchange procedures (deleted by the contest


working group 2021)
Standard Exchange
such as attempting a QSO on a frequency agreed via a chat room such as ON4KST.
As an example, suppose GM4VVX set up a QSO with G8BCG on ON4KST as follows (in practice, this is
all much simpler than when written down, and experienced operators will know from the contents of the
text box above what to send):
GM4VVX would
• Enter G8BCG’s call in his log
• Set up the text box as shown, and send message Tx1 in period 2:

Note that the report of 26 is the default – this would be amended to the actual report prior to transmission
of Tx2 or Tx3; once sent it should not be altered during the remainder of the QSO.
The GM4VVX sends a message to the ON4KST chat room such as:

VHF Handbook 9.00 167/180


IARU-R1
• /cq G8BCG Hi Peter, calling you on 70.232 VVX 2nd JT6M
G8BCG should set up the equivalent complementary text box and send the required information (initially
Tx1) in period-1:
Again, note that the report of 26 is the default – this would be amended to the actual report prior to
transmission of Tx2 or Tx3; once sent it should not be altered during the remainder of the QSO. (Note that
the serial number to be sent is in the normal sequence of contest serial numbers).
Once he is transmitting in period-1 G8BCG might respond with a message via ON4KST such as:
/cq GM4VVX RR Clive, now running.

Upon receipt of both calls, G8BCG should


• Enter GM4VVX in his log, and also the locator if received
• Send calls, report and serial number (in this case 005) (his Tx2):
GM4VVX G8BCG 26 005 26 005
When this information is received, GM4VVX will
• Log the received report as 26 and the serial number as 005 in his log
• Respond with (Tx3):
G8BCG GM4VVX R26 001 R26 001
The R is added to confirm receipt of the report and serial number, with the full calls sent again
When received correctly, G8BCG would
• Log the received report as 26 and the serial number as 001 in his log (note that the R is not logged,
since it is the equivalent of “Roger” in SSB QSOs and is not a part of the report).
• Respond with (his Tx4):
RRRR IO70RK G8BCG
The RRRR is confirmation of the acknowledgement of receipt of report and serial number.
The full locator added with the RRRR as there is space in this Tx box. At this stage G8BCG may be
shortened to BCG so the information may be passed more quickly.
Once GM4VVX has received the locator, he has everything he needs, and would
• Enter the locator in his log book if not entered earlier
• Respond with:
73 IO78TA GM4VVX or 73 IO78TA VVX
this confirms receipt of all required details, including locator; the full locator is added again as extra
in case the other operator had not copied it earlier.
When he receives this message, G8BCG
• Logs the locator in his log book (if not previously received)
• Responds in one of the following ways by sending
73 IO70RK BCG or CQ G8BCG IO70RK
or a posting on ON4KST such as:
/cq GM4VVX tnx FB QSO Clive 73 GL
This confirms that G8BCG has also received all the information, including locator.
The contest QSO is now complete.

Responding to CQ (as sent in Tx6 above)


When not on a calling frequency or centre of activity, the response should start with Tx2 and follow the
sequence shown above.

Notes:
• The example QSO above assumes that G8BCG copies both call-signs first – if GM4VVX copies both calls
before receiving a report from G8BCG, he responds with Tx2, and so on (roles reversed). Reports such

VHF Handbook 9.00 168/180


IARU-R1
as 26 are standard MS reports (see Appendix). However, on tropo paths it is permissible to use RS
signal reports such as 54.
• If long call-signs are in use, the report and serial number might only be sent once in Tx2 or Tx3 to fit
into the available space, e.g. MM6BYZ/P GM4VVX/P R26 005
• Be aware that some operators may use a different protocol, for example some may add the serial to
the RRRR or 73s so that it reads like RRRR 001 JO45VV or 73 001 JO45VV OE

VHF Handbook 9.00 169/180


IARU-R1
List of member societies charged with organising the IARU-
R1contests
Year 50 MHz 144 MHz UHF/SHF/µW ATV
1956 DARC
1957 RSGB
1958 VERON
1959 ARI
1960 SRJ
1961 SSA
1962 USKA
1963 ÖVSV
1964 UBA
1965 EDR
1966 REF
1967 DARC
1968 PZK
1969 CRCC
1970 SRAL
1971 NRRL
1972 RSGB
1973 SSA
1974 SRJ
1975 ÖVSV
1976 ARI
1977 VERON
1978 USKA
1979 UBA
1980 EDR
1981 DARC
1982 PZK
1983 NRRL
1984 RSGB
1985 SSA
1986 CRCC
1987 VERON UBA
1988 SRAL RSGB
1989 ARI ?
1990 BFRA VERON

VHF Handbook 9.00 170/180


IARU-R1
1991 RSGB RSGB
1992 DARC UBA
1993 ÖVSV DARC
1994 EDR USKA VERON
1995 SSA UBA REF
1996 NRRL CRCC UBA
1997 RSGB FRR RSGB
1998 FRR VERON VERON
1999 PZK RSGB DARC
2000 HRS DARC UBA
2001 ARI ARI REF
2002 CRC SRAL RSGB
2003 SSA SARA ZRS DARC
2004 EDR ÖVSV REF VERON
2005 PZK REF URE REF
2006 VERON CRC REF UBA
2007 PZK MARSZ CRC DARC
2008 ZRS HRS RSGB RSGB
2009 PZK REF PZK UBA
2010 UBA SARA ZRS REF
2011 VERON DARC DARC UBA
2012 DARC DARC DARC UBA
2013 DARC DARC DARC UBA
2014 DARC DARC DARC UBA
2015 DARC DARC DARC VERON
2016 DARC DARC DARC VERON
Since 2017 IARU-R1 is in charge of evaluation with the use of the IARU R1 Contest Robot

VHF Handbook 9.00 171/180


IARU-R1
LOCATOR SYSTEM
Deleted and replaced during the Landshut conference 2017
History
The scoring in official IARU Region 1 contests as well as in most sub-regional contests is based upon the
distance in kilometres between two stations making a complete QSO. To facilitate the measurement of this
distance, at a meeting of the VHF Working Group in The Hague in October 1959 a code system was
adopted for giving the location of a station. This was the QRA-Locator system, devised in Germany,
originally based on a two-stage sub-division of geographical longitudes and latitudes starting from the
Greenwich meridian and from 40 degrees North. At the Region 1 Conference in Malmö (1963) the system
was refined by introducing a third sub-division, and in its final form the QRA-Locator consisted of a
five-character code, viz. two capital letters, a two-digit number and a lower-case letter, for example CM72j.

Many Region 1 societies developed maps based on this system, either of their own country or of larger
parts of Western Europe.

At a meeting of the Region 1 VHF Working Group in Brussels (1965) Dr. H.R.Lauber, HB9RG, VHF
Manager of USKA, showed the first prints of the Region 1 QRA-Locator map, issued on four sheets and
made through his good offices at the request of the VHF Working Group.

At the Region 1 Conference in Opatija (1966) this map was adopted as the official Region 1 QRA-Locator
map, while at the Region 1 Conference in Scheveningen the system was re-baptised with the more
appropriate name QTH-Locator. In the meantime it had become very popular and was used not only during
contests but also for general amateur work on the VHF/UHF/SHF bands. For instance, collecting "squares"
(the first two letters of the QTH-Locator indicating a square of 2 degrees longitude wide and 1 degree
latitude high) became one of the most widely practised sports .

When amateurs outside Region I, especially in North America (Region II), became interested in using a
form of QTH-Locator during their contacts, contests etc. and started investigating the system devised in
Region I, they found this Locator system repeated itself several times around the globe. Hence they
considered this ambiguous system not very suitable for exchanging QTH information, for instance during
EME contacts.

Furthermore, the QTH- Locator system was not very consistent in the set-up of sub-divisions, particularly
with regard to the fifth character (letter). A more consistent system, if introduced, would be of use to the
many amateurs who employed computers - from PC's to programmable pocket calculators - to calculate
distances and determine antenna directions from QTH-Locators.

For reasons like the ones outlined above, at a meeting of the IARU Region 1 VHF Working Group in
Amsterdam (1976) SM5AGM, VHF Manager of SSA, proposed to start discussions on a better Locator
system that could replace the existing one and would be usable world-wide.

As there would not be much sense in changing to a world-wide applicable Locator system in Region 1 if
the other Regions would not adopt it, at the Region 1 Conference in Miskolc-Tapolca (1978) it was agreed
that Region 1 would consult the other two Regions on this matter. This consultation resulted in an
exchange of system proposals between the Regions, and at a certain moment more than 20 different
systems and variations on systems, generated in the various Regions, were under consideration!

At the VHF Working Group meeting in Maidenhead (1980) it was felt that the time had come to make a
choice, and it was agreed that the best choice would be the system devised by John Morris, G4ANB, be it
with a modification concerning the starting point of the grid of the first sub-division. This system was widely
published in amateur magazines of member societies in Region 1 as well as in the other Regions.

VHF Handbook 9.00 172/180


IARU-R1

Thanks to the effort of Folke Rasvall, SM5AGM - aided, amongst others, by ZL2AMJ (Region III) and
W1XX (Region II) - agreement between the Regions could be reached and all Regions have now accepted
the so-called Maidenhead Locator which henceforth will simply be known as the Locator.

Region II adopted the Locator in 1982, Region III in 1983. At the IARU Region 1 Conference in Cefalu
(1984) Region 1 adopted the Locator system, and the introduction date was set at January 1, 1986. As
from this date all official Region 1 contests are run using the new Locator system.

Description of the Locator system


This description was replaced by a new one during the Conference in Landshut 2017.
The Locator system is a grid system, allowing to give the location of a station by a code consisting of six
characters, viz. two capital letters, a two-digit number and, again, two capital letters. For example :
JO31DG.

The system is set up as follows. The globe is divided in 18 * 18 = 324 fields, each 20 degrees longitude
wide and 10 degrees latitude high. Each of these fields is divided in 10 * 10 = 100 squares, each 2
degrees longitude wide and 1 degree latitude high. Finally, each of the squares is divided in 24 * 24 = 576
sub-squares, each 5 minutes longitude wide and 2.5 minutes latitude wide. The coding/numbering is, as
shown in Appendix 2, always from west to east and from south to north, and the origin of the system is at
180 degrees west, 90 degrees south.

As far as "squares" are concerned, the system is compatible with the old QTH-Locator system, both having
squares of 2 degrees longitude, 1 degree latitude. The only difference, of course, is in the coding; for
instance, square CM in the QTH-Locator system will in the Locator system be square JO22. Consequently,
for the collectors of "squares" continuity is assured.

At the 1999 Conference in Lillehammer it was decided that a more precise definition of Alongitude@ and
Alatitude@ was required. The conference decided that the latitude and longitude to be used as a reference
for the determining of locators should be

Basis for determination of locators


The SRAL has proposed the WGS-84 geodetic system as a basis for converting latitude and longitude into
a Maidenhead Locator.

This proposal is important, because it thereby establishes the necessary link of the World-Wide
Maidenhead Locator system with an international geodetic system.

The latitude and longitude system of the Earth must be linked to a ‘zero point’. This point may be called a
geodetic center point. There are many such points in use; by cities, countries, continents, and for the
whole world. These Azero points@ are usually not coincidental. Therefore it is important to establish which
geodetic system the Maidenhead Locator System should be linked to.

When using a map or a GPS (Global Positioning Satellite) receiver to determine a Maidenhead Locator, it
is possible to have the map or the GPS receiver calculate the locator on the basis of many different
geodetic systems. In Europe the most commonly geodetic system used up to recent time has been the
European Datum of 1950, called ED-50.

The few last year’s more and more maps use their latitude and longitude linked to the newer world-wide
geodetic system World Geodetic System 1984, called WGS-84.

VHF Handbook 9.00 173/180


IARU-R1
The difference between latitude/longitude on ED-50 versus WGS-84 is of the order of 300 meters. This has
no practical consequence to radio amateurs calculating their Maidenhead Locator square other than the
radio amateurs close to the square borders. Then it has consequence for contest square multipliers.

VHF Handbook 9.00 174/180


IARU-R1
Extended locator system
The proposed extension follows the pattern of the Locator system by dividing each sub-square into a 10 by
10 grid of even smaller squares, each 0.5 ' from west to east and 0.25 ' from south to north. These sub-
sub-squares are called "micro-squares".
Two digits are added to the Locator. The first gives the longitude co-ordinate of the "micro-square" and the
second the latitude co-ordinate. For example, the region covered by Locator "IO86HA" would be divided as
follows:
IO86HA
09 99
08
0,25` 07 56° 02.5“ N
06 66 76
05 75 Extended
04 Locator
03
02 IO86HA76
01
00 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
56° 00,0” N
 0,5` 
` 3° 25,0” W 3° 20,0” W
Adopted at the IARU Region 1 Conference in De Haan (September 1993) on the proposal of the RSGB.
This extension is intended only for use by stations who require greater precision than obtainable with the
Locator system. For normal VHF/UHF/Microwave work the existing six-character Locator is adequate. This
extension should be published within Region 1 and communicated to Regions 2 and 3 with a view to
eventual world-wide agreement.

VHF Handbook 9.00 175/180


IARU-R1
DIGITAL COMMUNICATION
Data-transmission ( Recommendations D.1.1. and D.1.2.) - removed
IARU Region 1 Technical Recommendation D.1.1
WARSAW 1975,CEFALU 1984
GENERAL RTTY STANDARD
The RTTY signalling speed to be 45.45 bit/s. The use of a higher speed than 50 bit/s is not considered
appropriate at this time,
The RTTY transmission mode to be FSK on all bands with a preferred shift of 170 MHz on the bands
below 30 MHz an 170 or 850 Hz above 30 MHz. The mark signal shall be the higher radiated frequency,
Reception of RTTY by means of a two-tone system is encouraged for optimum communications
effectiveness,
In the interests of bandwidth efficiency and communications effectiveness AFSK operation on AM
transmitters is not encouraged. Where AFSK operation is used on VHF-UHF for local and autstart
communications the use of FM transmitters is strongly encouraged. In the interests of bandwidth efficiency
the use of a standard AFSK shift of 170 Hz is recommended. In this case the standard AFSK tones should
be 1275 Hz "space" and 1445 HZ "mark". If 850 Hz shift is used the "mark" frequency should be 2125 Hz.
AMTOR/RTTY STANDARD
All IARU member societies shall adopt CCIR 476-1 in both modes "A" and "B" and Region 1 shall be asked
to liaise with Regions 2 and 3 so that AMTOR may become a truly international standard
A speed of 45.45 bit/s is currently recommended , however speeds op 50, 75 and 100 bit/s should be
encouraged
Each society - only where such requirements still exist- should press their respective licensing authorities
to remove the requirement for "dual identification " when using the international standard CCITT number 2
code
The minimum specification for the signalling format should be 1 start bit, 7 data bits, 1 parity bit, 1 stop bit.
The parity should be as follows :
if generated even parity
if not generated parity bit set to space.

IARU Region 1 Technical Recommendation D.1.2


NOORDWIJKERHOUT 1987
STANDARDS FOR DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS
• Modulation methods
1. FM/AFSK (where allowed in the bandplans)
2. FSK : at speeds below 300 bit/s FSK is preferred
3. PSK : at speeds above 300 bit/s PSK is preferred
• General Applications :
1. Shifts for FSK and FM/AFSK :
2. at 1200 bits per second -1 kHz
3. below 1200 bits per second -850 Hz, 170 Hz (preferred)
4. Mark is always the higher frequency.
5. Note. For FM/AFSK the audio frequencies are :
6. - space 1275 Hz
7. - mark 1445 Hz or 2125 Hz, depending on shift
• Packet-Radio Applications: 1)
1. for 300 bit/s transmissions using FSK a shift of 200 Hz should be used;
2. for 1200 bit/s transmissions using FM/AFSK audio frequencies of 1200 and 2200 Hz should
be used (as in the Bell 202 standard).
3. On the bands below 30 MHz the signalling speed shall not be more than 300 bit/s.

VHF Handbook 9.00 176/180


IARU-R1
• Coding/bit- rates 6)
1. Baudot : 45.45, 50, 100 bits per second (50 bit/s preferred)
2. ASCII : 1 start bit, 7 data bits, 1 parity bit, 1 stop bit.
3. Parity: if generated - even parity
4. if not generated - parity bit set to space
5. 110 bits per second preferred.
• Protocols
1. Packet Radio : AX-25 as published by ARRL
2. AMTOR : CCIR 476-1, modes A and/or B.

Digital telephony ( Recommendation D.2.) (removed DAVOS 2005)

Vestigial Sideband AM ( Recommendation V.1.1.)


After some initial experiments with fast-scan TV transmission in the 145 MHz band around 1955/60 the
wider 435 MHz band seemed ideal for fast-scan broadcast quality ATV experiments. Although in several
Region 1 countries the parameters were set by the national administration, IARU Region 1 at its 1969
Conference in Brussels recommended "CCIR-2, following the Gerber standard".
At a later conference (Warsaw 1975 ) it was recommended to use "vestigial sideband techniques in the
435 MHz band" and at the same time "medium band ATV or SATV" was brought forward in order to
"conserve bandwidth" in the 435 MHz band. This aspect was important as in several countries in Region 1
amateurs could only use part of the 430-440 MHz band.
The 1987 Noordwijkerhout conference recommended that Vestigial Sideband ATV in the 435 MHz band
should use the 434-440 MHz segment with the carrier frequency either below 434.5 or above 438.5 MHz.
This, in fact, determined the maximum allowed bandwidth of the modulated signal.

Medium bandwidth ATV ( Recommendation V.1.2.)


As in several countries only 6 MHz of the 435 MHz band is allocated, the "normal" ATV transmission is not
possible. As an alternative the relatively narrow-band system proposed by DC6MR has been
recommended as an alternative.

IARU Region 1 technical recommendations concerning ATV


WARSAW1975

IARU Region 1 Technical Recommendation BASIC FAST SCAN AMATEUR TV STANDARD


• The standard transmission system for Amateur Television shall be the CCIR-2 system following the
Gerber standard.
• The use of vestigial sideband techniques should be encouraged for use in the 435 MHz band.
• ATV in the 435 MHz band should use the 434-440 MHz segment with the carrier frequency either
below 434.5 MHz or above 438.5 MHz.

IARU REGION 1 TECHNICAL RECOMMENDATION SATV


SATV - A SECOND TECHNICAL STANDARD FOR ATV
The technical parameters of SATV (small-bandwidth ATV) are as follows:
• Picture frequency and line frequency as for the CCIR-2 system.

6 Packet-Radio : It is recognised that in the future higher data rates will be achievable through the use of different modulation
methods. It is recommended, however, that in all cases for the frequencies used for communication between the user and a
network access point the bandwidth should not exceed 12 kHz. For links between packet-radio nodes higher data rates and
larger bandwidths may be used. For such high speed links ( greater than 1200 bit/s ) FM/AFSK is not preferred

VHF Handbook 9.00 177/180


IARU-R1
• Maximum video bandwidth between 500 kHz and 1 MHz.
• No audio carrier; the audio information is FM modulated on the video carrier, maximum deviation
∀5 kHz.
Note:
SATV transmitters are very easy to construct : no audio transmission is required and the tuning of the PA
stages is simple.

At the receiving end there are two possible concepts:


• The bandwidth of the TV receiver is made smaller and an I.F. limiter plus an FM detector are
added.
• A normal FM receiver is used for the audio part of the signal. From between the mixer and the I.F.
filter of this receiver the broadband signal is coupled to a separate I.F. amplifier and detector, and
the video signal obtained is sent to a video monitor.
Modern TV receivers can be easily modified for SATV.
Note:
Advantages: Better use of the bands - e.g. several simultaneous QSO's possible in the bandwidth
available in the 435 MHz band - and better signal range.
IARU Region 1 Technical Recommendation V.3
MISKOLC-TAPOLCA 1978
Facsimile standards
For facsimile transmissions in the Amateur Service the following characteristic values are preferred:
• The video (picture) modulated signal is generated at the audio frequency level, similar to the
technique used for SSTV. The edge frequencies for "black" and "white" are 1500 Hz and 2300 Hz
respectively; the frequencies corresponding to the half-tones are between these two frequencies.
The audio frequency bandwidth is maximally 3000 Hz.
• The rotation speed of the picture drum is switchable between 60, 90, 120, 150, 180 and 240 rpm,
with 60, 120, 180 and 240 rpm being the preferred values.
• The index of co-operation shall provisionally be 288, in accordance with CCIR recommendation.
Minor deviations from this value are permissible.
• Phasing-in signals and end-of-picture signals will be chosen at a later stage, taking into account
practical considerations based on the state-of-the-art.
• All Amateur Service allocations should be open for this mode of transmission. Operation via
repeaters and amateur satellites should also be allowed.
• For the transmissions F1C should be used. ( e.g. frequency shift keying of an audio frequency
sub-carrier, which modulates the main carrier in SSB, or direct FSK (shift-keying) of the main
carrier by the modulating signal). Additionally, on frequencies above 144.5 MHz mode F2C, i.e.
FM/AFSK modulation of the RF carrier by a frequency-modulated sub-carrier, is permitted.

IARU Region 1 Technical Recommendation V.2 for Microwave ATV


LILLEHAMMER1999,TORREMOLINOS 1991
STANDARDS FOR MICROWAVE FM ATV

> 1 GHz - <24 GHZ > 24 GHz


Mode of emmission F5/F3 F5/F3
Video bandwith (3dB) 5 MHz 5 MHz

VHF Handbook 9.00 178/180


IARU-R1
Pre -emphasis CCIR rec 405.1 CCIR Rec 405.1
Colour sub carrier 4.433618 MHz 4.433618 MHz
frequency
Maximum instant mod. - .05
index
Peak dev.(with pre- 3.5 MHz 3.5 MHz
emphasis)
Channel bandwith 12 MHz at -40 dB 12 MHz at -40 dB
18 MHz at -50 db
Sound sub-carrier 5.5 MHz 5.5 or 6 MHz
frequency
Sound sub-carrier - -14 dB
amplitude (with respect to
peak video)
Sound sub-carrier 0.07 0.2
modulations index

Notes
• A video filter having a -3 dB bandwidth of 5 MHz should be included in the modulating amplifier.
• A video peak clipper should be included after the pre-emphasis but before the video filter.
• DC clamping of the video signal should be included to prevent the nominal carrier frequency from
changing with different television scenes.
• An RF output filter should be included to prevent out of band energy from whatever source from
reaching the aerial system.
• When it is necessary to reduce the transmitted bandwidth on frequencies >24.0 GHz below that
shown above the sound carrier should be reduced in level or be removed altogether.

IARU Region 1 Technical Recommendation for Digital ATV


DATV is recommended based on the following parameters:

Symbol Rate
Frequency Band Maximum Bandwidth
(Msymbols/s)

435 MHz 2.00 2 MHz

1.3 GHz 2.00 or


4 MHz
Repeater i/p & simplex 4.00

1.3 GHz
4.00 4 MHz
Repeater o/p

2.3 GHz 4.00 4 MHz

3.4 GHz 2.00 2 MHz

VHF Handbook 9.00 179/180


IARU-R1
5.6 GHz 4.00 4 MHz

All bands above 5.6 GHz 4.00 4 MHz

Notes:

• To facilitate development, other modes and bandwidths may be used where conditions permit.
• The bandwidths in the table above are recommended maximums. Development of narrower
bandwidths are strongly encouraged as equipment allows
• DATV operators should ensure they transmit ‘clean’ signals in order to avoid adjacent channel
interference. Particular attention is recommended regarding power amplifier linearity and the
transmitted output spectrum
• Other frequency bands are permitted if the bandwidth is compatible. Any ATV operation should
avoid interference to narrowband frequency centres in the relevant band plan
• Established and/or open standards, along with a subset of Operating and frequency planning
parameters, should be adopted to:
o Ensure interoperability between DATV operators
o Ensure compatibility with readily available consumer hardware

VHF Handbook 9.00 180/180

You might also like